Home

OR100E/OR300E Handy Oscillographic Recorder User's Manual

1. Functional AC adapter connection jack Operation panel PC card PC card insert ground eject button LCD contrast adjustment knob Power switch Recharge Monitor LED Battery Alkaline dry cell Nickel Metal Hydride Upper External input output terminal Lll GND Trigger output Trigger input Sampling clock Start and Stop RS 232 connector External input output Belt attachment CHB CHA terminal Logic input connector Belt attachment IM OR100E 01E 1 1 sens 1 1 Names of the Parts and Their Functions Operation Panel The operation panel can be divided into the following groups of keys Keys dealing with setup of each channel These keys deal with the setup parameters that are individually set for each channel Keys used to set parameters These keys are used to set various parameters Keys for moving the cursor and scrolling the waveform START Execution keys Monitor key Keys for Start Stop key of operation These keys execute setting the Keys to display the setup screen various operations time axis These keys display various setup screens Playback screen key See next page for descripti
2. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Service request enable register ft m amp t_4 OR A B amp A Le amp A Mss 7 6 ESB MAVIEES EAV 1 0 status byte Ras i A A K y Occurrence of a service request E Output Error L queue queue 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable register ft t a OR A Le amp A lt amp A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event register 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event enable register lt amp i A i lt amp H t t OR A i amp hg A p amp t t 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Transit filter A A A 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Condition filter App 64 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Overview of Registers and Queues Status byte Function Writing Serial poll RQS Reading RQS STB MSS Service request enable registerz Function Masks status byte Writing SRE Reading SRE Standard event register Function Standard event Writing Reading ESR Standard event enable register Function Masks standard Writing ESE Reading ESE Extended event register Function Change in device Writing Reading STATus EESR Extended event enable register Function Masks extended Writing STA
3. Code Message Description 4 Settings complete Parameters have been set correctly 5 Waiting for connection Waiting to reconnect because the destination was busy 6 Connecting to line Connecting to the line to send FAX 7 Sending FAX Sending FAX 8 FAX complete FAX transmission completed successfully 9 Aborted sending FAX Aborted sending FAX 10 Waiting for error retry An error occurred while sending fax Reestablishing connection 20 Execution complete A successful completion 21 Acq memory initialized Initialized cleared the captured data in the acquisition memory 23 Calculating Calculation is being performed 24 Calc aborted Calculation was aborted 25 PC card has been detected PC card has been properly inserted 28 Accessing file OR100E is accessing the flash ATA card 29 Aborted file access Aborted the access to the flash ATA card 30 In measuring OR100E is making a measurement 33 Save completed File saving has been completed 40 Panel keys are locked Panel keys have been locked 41 Start key is locked Start key has been locked 42 Key lock is released Key lock has been released 43 Panel save completed Parameters have been saved 44 Panel load cpmpleted Parameters have been loaded 13 6 IM OR100E 01E Warning Messages 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Code Message Description Reference Page 52 Backup battery flat
4. Displays the calculation screen Selects the block to display Displays the cursor screen Sets the recording range and executes the recording To record the capture data press the PRINT key or press the F1 key on the Playback screen It will record the measurement data of the current displayed block Zooming in or out on the Waveform Pressing the Time axis key will zoom in on the waveform in the time axis direction Zoom out in the time axis direction Ton gt Zoom in the time axis direction Zooming in the voltage axis direction is done in the waveform scale screen by pressing the channel keys CH1 to CH4 ESC Trace VARIABLE Thin V4 up own Zoom in the voltage direction Zoom out in the voltage direction IM OR100E 01E sJ sN 9UWII S4I4 Chapter 4 Setting the Measurement Range Filter Time Axis and Linear Scaling 4 1 Setting Parameters The parameters shown below will be set in this chapter You will set these parameters using the screen that is displayed by pressing the CH1 to CH4 keys Zero adjustment is done at the screen that appears when the MONITOR key is pressed Setting parameters Description Input type Select temperature measurement using thermocouple DC voltage or ground Measurement range Set the measurement range in V div with the RANGE key Input coupling Select e
5. Operation Keys anne VU UG Aazp START STOP Makes a selection Moves between setting parameters Displays the setting menu 10 16 IM OR100E 01E 10 7 Saving Loading the Setup Data Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the data Select the data type with the F1 Data or F2 Panel key Select F2 Panel key to select setup data 2 Setting the function Select the operation Select the F1 Save or F2 Load key to save or load 3 Setting Selecting the filename If you are saving the data set the filename with eight characters or less You can use alphanumeric characters and special characters amp _ If you are loading the data a list of files that can be loaded is displayed Select the file with the F1 1 or F2 4 key 4 Executing the load Highlighting Execute and pressing the F1 Execute key executes the operation Note The following setup data cannot be saved Communication settings Current date and time Display language Parameters dealing with saving and loading Settings relating to saving or loading except for the save options for the measurement data Loading the setup data changes the current settings pn is the extension of the setup data file If the setup data are loaded using a memory length that is different from what it was at the time the
6. C 16 21 44 x 1 s div 1 2 ANA w cHe F DU C l QE gt Measurement start time Scrolls the waveform or moves the cursor Displays the captured data 7 10 IM OR100E 01E 7 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data Operating Procedure After capturing the data pressing the Playback key displays seven divisions of the most current measurement data Pressing the Playback key at a screen other than the screen displaying the captured data displays the screen of the captured data that was displayed previously The amount of data points that can be saved to the memory is the number of divisions specified for the record length If continuous was selected up to 200 div of measurement data is saved 800 div for OR100E with option L1 and L2 or OR300E 1 Recording the captured data There are two methods One is to press the PRINT key The other is to press the F1 Print key When Using the PRINT Key Record all the captured data with the built in printer When Using the F1 Key You can select the range and the destination of the recording Pressing the F1 Print key displays the screen for setting the record range and the record destination Go back to the Setthe record Set the record Execute the recording previous screen range destination BHulpiooey wnje y x Press the F2 Print area key to select the record range All
7. X Y Display Sample rate 0 ms _ End _19 975mS_ The time the last data was captured measured from the start of the data capture X axis Measurement range Y axis 30 Makes a selection Moves between setting parameters Displays the captured data 6 12 IM OR100E 01E 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the captured data Pressing the Playback key displays the last captured data block 2 Selecting the block to display Pressing the F3 Block key displays the menu for selecting which block to display Select the block to display with the F2 and F3 keys ESC Previous Next Overview l l Go back to the previous screen Display block information One block backward One block forward When displaying the block information the block of which the information is displayed is changed 3 Scrolling the waveform Pressing the SCROLL CURSOR key changes the display range of waveform The display range is displayed on the lower section of the screen 4 Not displaying the waveform On the playback screen press the channel key CH1 to CH4 keys that you do not want displayed Pressing the F2 Trace key If set to OFF the waveform is not displayed Trace VARIABLE Thin Y Go back to the previous screen
8. string data gt SYSTem TNUM2 Example SYSTEM TNUM2 0123456789 SYSTEM TNUM2 SYSTEM TNUM2 0123456789 gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 53 TRIGger Group TRIGger Group The commands in the TRIGger group set or query system parameters These commands correspond to the TRIGGER key Gis On GD COMBination act TO LEVel lt Space gt lt NRf gt lt Space gt OFF e lt Space gt lt NRf gt OFFSet lt Space gt lt NRf gt PEAK lt Space gt lt NRf gt PHASe lt Space gt e lt NRf gt TOLerance lt Space gt TYPE lt Space gt DELay EXTernal lt Space gt lt NRf gt J lt Space gt AND r FF lt Space gt FREQuency ol p lt lt Space gt lt Frequency gt f J App 54 IM OR100E 01E TRIGger Group O KIND lt Space gt f THDlec A Lom MODE lt Space gt FREE A e CONDition CHANnel lt Space gt OFF LEVel ll lt Space gt i lt Space gt CHANne i lt Space g
9. 1 Port 2 Baud rate 9 3 Parity None 4 Handshaking Off Off 5 Stop bit as 6 Data length 8 7 Set r Date amp Time Date 977 9 3 Time 1 1 21 Set m General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc On Next page Initialize RS232 Modem Operation Keys enu eC D Displays the setting menu Makes a selection 7a ira a3 Fe fer Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 11 8 IM OR100E 01E 11 5 Setting the RS 232 Operating Procedure 1 Setting the communication port Select the communication port with the F1 RS232 or F2 Modem key Here select F1 RS232 key 2 Setting the baud rate Set the baud rate with the F1 to F4 keys Pressing NEXT displays the next set of selections Select the baud rate from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 3 Setting the parity Select the parity with the F1 Odd F2 Even or F3 None key 4 Setting the handshake Select the handshaking method with the F1 Off Off F2 KON XON F3 XON RS or F4 CS RS key 5 Setting the stop bit Select the stop bit with the F1 1 or F2 2 key 6 Setting the data length Select the data length with the F1 7 or F2 8 key 7 Confirming the setting Highlighting Set and pressing the F1
10. 12 8 Initializing Select the parameters to initialize and execute All Initialize setting parameters and internal memory Wave Initialize internal memory Filename Numbers for the following file names memd KKK auto KKK disp Setting Screen SYSTEM m Communication Port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Parity None Handshaking Off Off Stop bit Al Data length 8 Set r Date amp Time Date 977 9 3 Time 1 7 24 Set m General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc On Next JE All Data Fite gt Operating Procedure At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Initialize Pressing the F1 All F2 Wave or F3 File key executes the initialization Note When performing a complete initialization All the setting parameters and measurement data in the internal memory are initialized Save important setup data and measurement data to the flash ATA card beforehand For instructions on saving see 10 3 Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 10 5 Saving Loading the Setup Data IM OR100E 01E 12 11 7 O D 5 D 5 D ro 7 Tl c 5 d 5 D 12 9 Starting Stopping Measurement with External Signal Setting screen the trigger in terminal Copy action BMP file RMS Statis calc On Next page
11. How to Use This Manual Manual Structure This manual is divided into 14 chapters an appendix and an index as follows Chapter Title Description 1 Overview Describes the functions of the OR100E OR130 and its parts Reading this chapter helps you to understand the operation procedures that are described in the following chapters 2 Before Operation Describes handling precautions installation of the recorder connection to the power supply installation and recharging of the batteries power switch loading of the roll chart setting of the date and time and so on 3 First time Users Describes the basic operations of the recorder Describes easy methods to set the measurement range sample rate and trigger Also describes how to display or record the captured data 4 Setting the Measurement Describes how to set the measurement conditions such Range Filter Time Axis as the measurement range filter and time axis Also and Linear Scaling describes how to set the zero adjustment and linear scaling Describes the monitor screen 3 Triggering Describes how to set the normal trigger and the wave window trigger 6 Data Capturing Describes how to capture the measured data to the internal memory display or record the captured data and read or calculate values using the cursor 7 Realtime displaying and Describes how to display and record the measurement Recording data in realtime 8
12. Input cable Input terminal Connection 1 Connect the end of the input cable with the terminal chip to the input terminal of the DC DC converter The center terminal of the input terminal is not used 2 Check that there is no current flowing to the connection terminals on the supply side then connect the input cable to them Make sure the polarities are correct when connecting the DC DC converter to the supply side 3 Connect the power cord of the DC DC converter to the AC adapter connection jack of the OR100E OR300E Power Switch ON OFF Before Turning ON the Power This recorder can use AAA Alkaline dry cells AC power supply sold separately DC power supply sold separately or NiMH battery sold separately Before turning ON the power prepare the power supply as explained in the previous sections Note If you are using Alkaline dry cells or NiMH battery remove the power cord and the AC adapter If the AC adapter is connected the recorder will operate on the AC power supply Power Switch Operation Pressing the side of the power switch turns the recorder ON Pressing the side of the power switch turns the recorder OFF When the power switch is turned ON the recorder will run a self test Then the waveforms are displayed with the display conditions before the last time you turned OFF the power 2 18 IM OR100E 01E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF Adjusting
13. O v o E v 2 13 F i 55 Displays the monitor screen Changes the display update rate 4 12 IM OR100E 01E 4 7 Monitor Display Zero Adjust Operating Procedure 1 Monitor displaying Pressing the MONITOR key sets the screen to the monitor display screen The current input can be confirmed on the screen The data is not saved Switching between the analog waveform display and digital value display Pressing the MONITOR key again in the monitor display screen switches the analog waveform display and the digital value display Monitor 2 7 BALI Measurement value 1 83 WAU m Analog channel When input is OFF Bit No AEA Logic channel A Logic channel B 2 Pause the waveform display Press the F1 Freeze key on the monitor screen The waveform display updating stops To resume press the F1 Release key 3 Zero adjusting Execute zero adjust to obtain a high precision measurement Press the NEXT key on the monitor screen then F1 Zero cal key The ground level will be adjusted to zero About the Display Update Rate Pressing the time div key on the monitor screen changes the rate waveforms are displayed but does not actually change the time div when measuring the data The display update rate set at the monitor screen is the rate used on the screen that ap
14. dat Save Analysis format Method Auto save after data capturing Save on the analyzed data display Trend save Memory Mode Harmonic Waveform Analysis Harmonic Auto Analysis Waveform data auto dat Waveform data auto dat Waveform data auto dat Analyzed data harmo csv Analyzed data harmo csv Analyzed data trend csv Save format Analysis Method Memory Mode Save on the waveform display screen Binary format Waveform data disp dat ASCII format Waveform data disp csv Save data to the flash ATA memory card while capturing data memd dat Harmonic Mode Analyzed data disp dat Analyzed data disp csv IM OR100E 01E 10 9 eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g 10 4 Writing Data Simultaneously to the Flash ATA Memory Card Setting Screen Mode 1 6kS s Format Azone Length PC Card 13minl sec Time length during which data T scale Mag x1 can be saved to the Flash ATA Trigger kind Normal memory card Memory clear On Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation On Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Logic 1234 Length Continue CH A Gauge print Off CH B Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Memory Realti
15. lt Space gt gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 17 CHANnel Group lt Character string gt Cunt al lt Space gt UPPScale lt Space gt CHANnel lt X gt Function Syntax Example Queries the settings for the specified channel CHANnel lt X gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL1 CHANNEL1 COMMENT OR100E BS FILTER Off INPUT DC MAGNI 1 NULL 0 POSITIONO 0 RANGE 10 000E 00 SCALING MODE 0 POS1 SCALE 5 0000E 0 VOLT 5 0000E 0 CHANNEL1 SCALING POS2 SCALE 5 0000E 0 VOLT 5 0000E 0 CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT mV CHANNEL1 TAG OR100E CHANnel lt X gt COMMent Function Syntax Example Sets queries the annotation message for the specified channel CHANnel lt X gt coMMent lt character string gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt COMMent lt character string gt 20 characters or less CHANNEL1 COMMENT OR1OOE CHANNEL1 COMMENT CHANNEL1 OR1LOOE COMMENT CHANnel lt X gt FiLTer Function Syntax Example Sets queries the filter for the specified channel CHANnel lt X gt FILTer lt character string gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt FILTer lt character string gt Off SHZ 500HZ CHANNEL1 FILTER 5Hz CHANNEL1 FILTER CHANNEL1 FILTER 5H
16. to 4 5 QU aes lt 1 CH4 Input Filter N Scaling De vlloft oft vll amp Comm 1 r CH 1 Range 1 U 2 Sealing 3 Unit J Volt Scale 4 Pos 1 5 000 5 0001 5 Pos 2 5 000 5 0001 Comment Tag ESC Operation Keys Go back to the previous screen Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Moves between setting parameters values numerical value when values 4 10 IM OR100E 01E Moves the input position when entering characters numerical Selects the character or entering characters numerical 4 6 Setting the Linear Scaling Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the linear scaling setting screen Press the F4 Scaling amp Comm key 2 Setting ON OFF Press the F2 On key or the F3 751550 key when using YOKOGAWA 751550 OR300E only scheduled release to perform linear scaling Press the F1 Off key not to perform linear scaling 3 Setting the unit Set the unit with six characters or less 4 Setting Point1 P1 As shown in the figure below by setting scale values to the two arbitrary measured voltages the scale converting equation y ax b is determined Scale value Point 2 rs y ax b Point 1 Point 1 Point 2 Voltage value Enter the voltage value measured value at Point and the co
17. ialize ACQuire ialize ALL Group ACCumulate CHARt CPRint FORMat GAUGe GRID channel Sends the data of the specified logic channel of the specified waveform Sets queries which point of the specified waveform is to be the first App 25 data Queries the trigger point of the specified waveform Queries the trigger time of the specified waveform Queries all the setting values relating to saving and loading Loads the setup data Queries all the setting values relating to saving Saves all blocks measured data in binary format Saves the measured data in ASCII format Saves the measured data in binary format Sets queries the channel to save Sets queries the save comments Sets queries the end data number to save Sets queries whether or not to set the option used in saving Saves the setup data Sets queries the start data number for saving Initializes acquisition memory Initializes all memory Queries all menu screen settings Sets queries the accumulate display App 25 App 25 App 26 App 26 App 26 App 26 App 26 App 26 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 27 App 33 App 33 Sets queries the chart speed when the mode is in realtime memory App 33 mode Sets queries contents of the channel print Sets queries the display format Sets queries contents of the gage print Sets queries the grid setting App 33 App 33 App 33 App 33 App 10 IM OR100E
18. Between input terminals HI LO and the ground Overvoltage category Maximum Input Voltage CAT II environment 500 Vrms CAT III environment 300 Vrms 1 CAT II environment Environment represented by research laboratories and offices Local level equipment transportable equipment Primary side of an equipment having a power cord that connects to the power outlet CAT III environment Power distribution level of a building or a factory Primary power supply system level Primary side of an equipment receiving electricity directly from the distribution board or from the branch section to the power outlet IM OR100E 01E 14 1 o no Q O D 5 D 14 1 Measurement Input DC coupling Measurement range and accuracy As shown below 23 5 C after zero calibration after 30 minute warm up DC coupling measuring range time div actual measuring range accuracy 100 mV FS 10 mV div 100 0 mV 1 of FS 1 mV 200 mV FS 20 mV div 200 0 mV 1 of FS 1 mV 500 mV FS 50 mV div 500 0 mV 1 of FS 1 mV 1 V FS 100 mV div 1 000 V 1 of FS 1 mV 2 V FS 200 mV div 2 000 V 1 of FS 1 mV 5 V FS 500 mV div 5 000 V 1 of FS 1 mV 10 V FS 1 V div 10 00 V 1 of FS 1 mV 20 V FS 2 V div 20 00 V 1 of FS 1 mV 50 V FS 5 V div 50 00 V 1 of FS 1 mV 100 V FS 10 V div 100 0 V 1 of FS 1 mV 200 V FS 20 V div 200 0 V 1 of FS 1 mV 500 V FS 50 V div 500 0 V 1
19. Content Displays the relative harmonic content of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion IEC CSA and total RMS value with digital values Phase Displays the phase angle of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion IEC CSA and total RMS value with digital values Note If waveform analysis is selected on the menu screen after measurement data are captured under automatic analysis and the data are displayed without starting a new set of measurements parameters that an be analyzed under automatic analysis are displayed and analysis can be carried out 3 Setting the channel Pressing the F3 key opens a menu for selecting the channel to analyze Select the channel number using F1 to F4 keys IM OR100E 01E 9 11 siskjeuy d1uOWeH 9 5 Analyzing by Specifying the Range Executing the harmonic analysis 1 Displaying the menu Pressing the F1 Analysis key at the screen displaying the captured data displays a menu for selecting the analysis condition ESC Content 9 CH 3 J Execute 2 Executing Pressing the F4 Execute key starts the harmonic analysis Note If the measurement data are over the range the results of the analysis will be displayed with asterisks Waveform data outside the measurement range may not be measured accurately making exact analysis impossible When the parameter to be anal
20. Harmonic Current RMS Value RMS The harmonic current can also be found in the similar way with the following equation An Anr Ani 2 Note Since the computational result is linearly scaled in the harmonic mode the result may become negative depending on the linear scale setting Relative Harmonic Content Taking the relative harmonic content of RMS value of the fundamental component to be 100 the relative harmonic content of RMS value for each order is computed nth order relative harmonic content RMS value of the nth order RMS value of fundamental component x 100 Phase Angle Computes the phase difference of the nth order harmonic component with respect to the fundamental component of the input signal For harmonic voltage 0 the phase of the nth order harmonic voltage phase of the fundamental component x n tan V V n tan V V xn where Vnr real component of the nth order Vni imaginary component of the nth order 9 20 IM OR100E 01E 9 10 Calculating Statistics For harmonic current 6 the phase of the nth order harmonic current phase of the fundamental component x n tan A_ A tan A A xn where Anr real component of the nth order Ani imaginary component of the nth order Active Power Automatic Analysis Single phase two wire system Wn V X A x cos n n 1 2 3 n 1 n W nth order active power V nth order active voltage A nth or
21. TRIGger LOGic FCOunt Filter Count Function _Sets Queries the trigger filter amount of the logic ch for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger LOGic FCOunt lt NRf gt TRIGger LOGic FCOunt lt NR gt 1 to 255 Example TRIGGER LOGIC FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER LOGIC FCOUNT TRIGGER LOGIC FCOUNT 1 TRIGger LOGic FILTer Function Sets Queries the trigger filter of the logic ch for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger LOGic FILTer OFF ON TIMeout TRIGger LOGic FILTer Example TRIGGER LOGIC FILTER TIMEOUT TRIGGER LOGIC FILTER TRIGGER LOGIC FILTER TIMEOUT App 60 IM OR100E 01E TRIGger Group TRIGger MODE TRIGger SYNChronize EDGE Function Sets Queries the trigger mode Function Sets Queries the synchronization trigger Syntax TRIGger edge of the wave window trigger MODE lt Character data gt Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize TRIGger MODE EDGE RISE FALL Example TRIGGER MODE SINGLE TRIGger SYNChronize EDGE TRIGGER MODE TRIGGER Example TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE MODE SINGLE TRIGger RWAVe Reference Wave Function Sets Queries the reference waveform of the EDGE RISE TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE EDGE TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE EDGE RISE wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger RWAVe IDEal AUTO TRIGger RWAVe Example TRIGGER RWAVE IDEAL TRIGGER RWAVE TRIGGER RWAVE IDEAL TRIGger SYNChronize LEVel Function Sets Queries the synchronization trigg
22. Yes key confirms the setting Pressing the F2 No key cancels the setting IM OR100E 01E 11 9 suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Buisn ey 11 6 FAX Modem You can use the FAX modem to fax the captured data This is possible in memory mode and realtime memory mode You can record the continuous analog waveform digital values and X Y waveform You can also record the screen image with the FAX see 12 2 Taking a Hard Copy Specification Modem control command Conforms to Hayes AT command FAX control command Conforms to EJA 592 Class 2 Dialing method Pulse dialing tone dialing Data speed between the recorder 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps and the FAX modem Note The communication parameters besides the data speed parity handshake stop bit data length between the recorder and the FAX modem can be set automatically e If the phone line is unstable set the data speed to 9600 bps or less FAX Modem Card For information on the modem cards that can be used with this recorder contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual Useable FAX modem cards e US Robotics Magahertz XJ 4336 e 3Com XJ1560J Communication Speed The communication speed between the recorder and the FAX modem and the speed between the FAX modem and the FAX are different See the following table OR100E FAX Modem OR100E setting FAX Modem FAX 1200 to 4800 bps 2400 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 1
23. data gt MINS MIN10 MIN30 HOUR1 MENU RDINterval Example MENU RTDIV SEC2 lt Character data gt SEC1 MENU RTDIV MENU RTDIV SEC2 SEC2 SEC5 SEC10 SEC30 SEC60 MIN10 MIN60 Example MENU RDINTERVAL SEC1 MENU RDINTERVAL gt MENU RDINTERVAL SEC1 MENU STYLe valid only when the format is X Y Function Sets queries the recording method when the recording format is X Y Syntax MENU STYLe LINE DOT MENU STYLe Example MENU STYLE LINE MENU STYLE MENU STYLE LINE gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 39 MENU Group MENU TPRint Time print Function Syntax Example Sets queries the time printing MENU TPRint lt Boolean gt MENU TPRint MENU TPRINT ON MENU TPRINT MENU TPRINT 1 MENU TRIGger valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory and the format is T Y Function Syntax Example Sets queries the kind of trigger MENU TRIGger NORMal WWTRigger MENU TRIGger MENU TRIGGER NORMAL MENU TRIGGER MENU TRIGGER NORMAL MENU TSMag valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory and the format is T Y Function Syntax Example Sets queries the T axis zoom factor for memory display and recording MENU TSMag lt NR gt MENU TSMag lt NR f gt 11 factors from 2 to 12 MENU TSMAG 2 MENU TSMAG MENU TSMAG 2 MENU XY lt X gt Function Syntax Example
24. e Do not disassemble heat or expose to fire e Do not short the batteries e Do not recharge the batteries e Do not solder onto the batteries e Do not use the manganese dry cell e Use new batteries from the same manufacturer e When replacing the batteries replace all six e Remove the batteries if not used for long time Operation time of alkaline dry cells The operation time of alkaline dry cells depend on the environment and how it is used See the following table for a typical figure Condition Operation Time Trigger wait condition without options About 2 hours OR100E About 110 minutes OR300E Recording an 1 Hz cycle waveform with 2 s div setting About 30 minutes OR100E About 20 minutes OR300E IM OR100E 01E 2 11 uoneiodo a10jog D 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF Procedure on Placing the Batteries 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF If you are using the separately sold AC adapter check that the AC adapter is not connected 2 Turn the OR100E OR300E upside down and remove the Alkaline dry cell holder located on the bottom side of the recorder 3 Place six Alkaline batteries in the holder Make sure to place them in the right direction See figure below 4 Attach the dry cell holder to the recorder When Using the AC Adapter Before Connecting the Power Supply Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the recorder e Use the power cord t
25. 106 Clear to send e XON RTS XON RS PC OR100E PC SD 3 3 SD SD 3 Ro 2 2 rp RD 2 o RS 7 7 RS RS 7 cs 8 8 CS cS 8 SG 5 5 SG SG 5 OR100E 3 SD 2 RD 7 RS 8 CS e CTS RTS CS RS PC OR100E SD 3 3 SD RD 2 gt 2 RD RS 7 7 RS cs s s cs SG 5 5 SG 5 SG IM OR100E 01E 11 3 suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Bulsn ey 11 3 Handshaking When using the RS 232 interface for transferring data it is necessary for equipment on both sides to agree on a set of rules to ensure the proper transfer of data The set of rules is called handshaking Because there are many handshaking methods that can be used in combination with the computer the same method must be chosen for the recorder and the computer You can choose any of the four methods shown in the following table Handshaking Methods means it is a valid selection Data Sending Control Handshaking method OR100E menu OFF OFF NO NO Control for sending data to a computer Data Receiving Control Control for receiving data from a computer Software Handshake Hardware Handshake Stops sending when X OFF is received Resume when X ON is received Stops sending when CB CTS is false Resume when it is true No hand shaking Software Handshake Hardware Handshake Send X OFF when receive data buffer is 3 4th filled Send X ON when receive
26. Data length 800 File size TKByte Comment Pressing the F4 Back key returns to the screen with the list of files 4 Executing the load Highlighting Execute and pressing the F1 Yes key loads the measurement data Note Loading the measurement data clears all previous measurement data in the internal memory Loading the measurement data sets the number of blocks to 1 If you start the measurement the loaded data will be cleared Data that is loaded can be saved to the flash ATA card again However if measurement data that had been saved to the flash ATA memory card while capturing data are loaded and the file exceeds 128 K then the data cannot be saved to the flash ATA memory card again IM OR100E 01E 10 13 eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g 10 6 Displaying the Loaded Measurement Data You can display the measurement data that are loaded from an external storage Setting Screen PLAY BACK Trigger position Time of the left most part of the display Time axis zoom factor Cursor display Record the captured data Operation time div Keys H H CHO Ea Se Q dD 2 Displayed range Time of the right most part of the display Displayed block No media J J i i Jz i 7 iint J 4 p E N ex1 omsvdiv Blockt 3252 Total number of blocks Select the block print J ourbor _
27. HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL3 CONTENT 1 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL4 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU HARMONIC TREND POWER1 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 1 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU HARMONIC TREND POWER2 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 App 34 IM OR100E 01E MENU Group MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt 1 POWer lt X2 gt Valid only when the operation POWer lt X2 gt ORDer Valid only when the mode is set to harmonic and the analysis operation mode is set to harmonic and the method is set to automatic analysis analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Queries all the setting values relating to the Function Sets queries which harmonic order to save channel or power of the trend save of the during trend save of automatic analysis automatic analysis Syntax MENU HARMonic TRENd Syntax MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt ORDer ODD3TO9 ODD3TO19 ODDALL lt X1 gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 2 ALL Example MENU HARMONIC TREND MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANNEL1 MENU HARMONIC CHANnel lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt ORDer TREND CHANNEL1 CONTENT 0 lt X1 gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 2 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 1 Example MENU HARMONIC TREND TOTAL 0
28. RLENGTH gt MENU MENU PLENgth valid only when the mode REENGTH CONTINUE is memory or real amp memory and the recording Description 800 is for long memory model only models wave MENU RPRint valid only when the mode is Function Sets queries record length g realtime Syntax MENU PLENgth CONTinue A4 AS MENU PLENgth Example MENU PLENGTH CONTINUE MENU PLENGTH gt MENU PLENGTH CONTINUE Function Sets queries the simultaneous recording Syntax MENU RPRint lt Character data gt MENU RPRint When the format is T Y lt Character data gt OFF WAVE NUMeric MENU PMODe valid only when the mode is When the format is X Y memory or real amp memory lt Character data gt OFF ON Function Sets queries record mode Example MENU RPRINT OFF Syntax MENU PMODe WAVE NUMeric MENU RPRINT MENU MENU PMODe RPRINT OFF Example MENU PMODE WAVE MENU PMODE MENU PMODE WAVE MENU RTDiv valid only when the mode is realtime and the format is T Y MENU RDINterval valid only when the Function Sets queries the time axis rate of the mode is realtime and the simultaneous recording realtime recording is numerical values and the format is T Y Syntax MENU RTDiv lt Character data gt Function Sets queries the digital printing interval MENU RTDiv during realtime recording lt Character data gt SEC2 Syntax MENU RDINterval lt Character SEC5 SEC10 SEC30 MIN1 MIN2
29. STATIS HARMonic STARt Sets queries the first data number of the harmonic analysis App 48 STATIs STARt Sets Queries the data number of the start of the calculation App 48 STATIs XY lt X gt INTEG1 Queries the calculated area of the X Y recording App 48 STATIS XY lt X gt INTEG2 Queries the calculated area during X Y App 48 STATus Group STATus Queries all the settings relating to the status of the communication App 49 function STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition register App 49 STATus EESE Sets Queries the extended event enable register App 49 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the App 49 register STATus ERRor Queries the error code and message head of the error queue App 50 STATus FILTer lt X gt Sets Queries the specified transition filter App 50 STATus QENable Sets Queries whether or not to store messages other than error App 50 messages in the error queue STATus OMESsage Sets Queries whether or not to add the message contents to the App 50 STATus ERR response STATus SPOL1 Executes a serial poll App 50 gt 3 3 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 13 Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page SYSTem Group SYSTem Queries all the system settings App 52 SYSTem CACTion Sets Queries the destination of the hard copy App 52 SYSTem CLEVel lt x gt SYSTem CLOCk SYSTem CLOCk DATE SYSTem CLOCk TIME SYSTe
30. TRIGGER key is pressed set Ext Trig to Rise Note Because the trigger output is a TTL level signal set the trigger type to Rise when operating synchronously IM OR100E 01E 12 3 SUOI IUNY SNOSUBUB 9OSI RI 12 2 Taking a Hard Copy There are three ways to save the screen image Record with the built in printer Save the data in BMP format to the flash ATA card Output over the FAX modem Setting Screen SYSTEM r Communication _ Port RS232 Baud rate 9680 Parity None Handshaking Off Off Stop bit be 4 Data length 8 Set m Date amp Time Date 977 9 3 Time 1 4 45 Set m General Copy action ER Expansion calc On Next page Initialize Printer FAX err tue Record to the built in Output to FAX Save the data in BMP format printer to the flash ATA card 12 4 IM OR100E 01E 12 2 Taking a Hard Copy Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the output method At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed select the Copy action from Printer FAX or BMP file 2 Taking the hard copy Pressing the COPY key will output the current screen image AN CAUTION When outputting to FAX or saving in BMP format do not remove the flash ATA card or the FAX modem card until a message is displayed indicating the completion of the hard copy Doing so may damage the PC card Note You cannot hard co
31. XY key to set the recording format to XY 2 Setting the style Select the record style from the following Line Record by connecting the measurement points with a line Point Record the measurement points as points 3 Setting the simultaneous recording Set to ON when recording to the chart 4 Setting the Y axis Select the channel to assign to the Y axis X axis is fixed to channel 1 7 6 IM OR100E 01E 7 5 Starting Stopping Operating Procedure 1 Starting the measurement Pressing the START key starts the measurement and displays the measurement data on the screen in realtime If the simultaneous recording is set to Wave or Numeric it will also start recording with the built in printer When using X Y format the screen displays the X Y waveform When the measurement is stopped with the STOP key it is recorded with the built in printer Note You cannot change any other settings when using X Y format 2 Stopping the measurement Pressing the STOP key stops the measurement About the chart speed Chart speed is the time div set in 4 3 Setting the Time Axis Since 1 div 10 mm converting to speed gives Chart speed 10 time div The unit of time div is seconds The following table shows the relationship between time div and chart speed time div Chart speed 2 s div 5 mm s 5 s div 2 mm s 10 s div 1 mm s 30 s div 20 mm min 1 min div 10 mm min 2 min div 5 mm
32. and F2 keys Pressing the F1 Cut down key decreases the zoom factor and pressing the F2 Expand key increases the zoom factor The zoom factors that can be specified depends on the data length 3 Setting the accumulate display Set the accumulate display to ON OFF This is valid when the trigger mode is set to repeat The accumulated display disappears when the screen is scrolled or when the time div or the voltage axis is changed Off Do not accumulate On Display Record the waveforms from the start of the measurement to the end by overlapping them It is convenient to have the accumulate display set to ON such as when comparing the waveform with the previously measured waveform 4 Setting the logic channel Set whether or not to display record the logic inputs Also set the display positions Set the display record to ON OFF for each bit When a check mark is in the check box it is ON Otherwise it is OFF Select the position of the display record from the following Off Do not display record Both Display Record channel A in the upper section and channel B in the lower section If the display format is 2 zone or 4 zone display record channel A in the upper section of the top zone and channel B in the lower section of the bottom zone Bottom Display Record both channel A and B in the lower section of the bottom zone Equal Display Record each bit in equal intervals If the display format is 2 zone display
33. gt 1 to 100 Example FILE SAVE END 100 FILE SAVE END FILE SAVE END 100 Discription Set the end position as a percentage of the data length INITialize Group E ALL INITialize ACQuire Function INITialize Initializes acquisition memory Syntax INITialize ACQuire Example INITIALIZE ACQUIRE FILE Group FILE SAVE OPTion Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to set the option used in saving FILE SAVE OPTion lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE OPTion FILE SAVE OPTION ON FILE SAVE OPTION FILE SAVE OPTION 1 FILE SAVE PANel Function Syntax Example Saves the setup data FILE SAVE PANel lt Character string gt lt Character string gt filename 8 characters or less FILE SAVE PANEL DATA1 FILE SAVE STARt Function _ Sets queries the start data number for saving Syntax FILE SAVE STARt lt NRf gt FILE SAVE STARt lt NRE gt 0 to 99 Example FILE SAVE START 0 FILE SAVE START FILE SAVE START 0 Discription Set the start position as a percentage of the data length INITialize ALL Function Initializes setup data and the acquisition memory Syntax INITialize ALL Example INITIALIZE ALL IM OR100E 01E App 27 gt 3 ke 5 x MENU Group MENU Group The commands in the MENU group set or query data capturing conditions display format and recording format This command
34. lt Character string data gt lt Block data gt Arbitrary 8 bit data Example Response containing captured waveform data 800000010ABCDEFGHIJ lt Decimal gt lt Decimal gt indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are given in NR form specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Description Example lt NRI gt Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 lt NRf gt Any of the forms lt NR1 gt to is allowed lt NRf gt represents the case when any of the forms lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt can be used The recorder accepts decimal values from the controller in any form lt NRf gt The form lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt used for the response message is determined for each query The same form is used irrespective of whether the value is large or small IM OR100E 01E App 5 gt 3 3 5 x Data When using lt NR3 gt the after the E can be omitted but the cannot be If a value outside the setting range is specified the closest valid value will be used If the value specified is beyond the precision of the recorder the value will be rounded lt Voltage gt lt Time gt lt Frequency gt lt Voltage gt lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt indicate decimal values which have physical significance lt Multiplier gt or lt Unit gt
35. of FS 1 mV 1000 V FS 100 V div 500 V 1 of FS 1 mV Zero position Variable within measurement range with NULL function 10 of measurement range or less Temperature coefficients Zero point 0 04 of FS C Gain 0 02 of FS C Frequency characteristics filter off DC to 40 kHz 1 3 dB Typical Typical values represent typical or average values It is not strictly guaranteed Common mode rejection ratio 85 dB or more 50 60 Hz signal source resistance less than 500 Q Low pass filter Filter can be turned ON OFF except for harmonic analysis mode Cutoff frequency 5 Hz 500 Hz Filter characteristics 6 dB octave Noise filter off input shorted at 10 mV div 2 0 mVp p Typical Typical values represent typical or average values It is not strictly guaranteed 14 2 IM OR100E 01E 14 1 Measurement Input RMS OR300E Measurement range and accuracy As shown below 23 5 C after zero calibration after 30 minute warm up RMS measuring range time div actual measuring range accuracy 100 mV FS 10 mV div 100 0 mV rms 2 of FS 1 mV 200 mV FS 20 mV div 200 0 mV rms 2 of FS 1 mV 500 mV FS 50 mV div 500 0 mV rms 2 of FS 1 mV 1 V FS 100 mV div 1 000 V rms 2 of FS 1 mV 2 V FS 200 mV div 2 000 V rms 2 of FS 1 mV 5 V FS 500 mV div 5 000 V rms 2 of FS 50 mV 10 V FS 1 V div 10 00 V rms 2 of FS 50 mV 20 V FS 2 V div 20 00 V rms 2 of FS 50 mV
36. x IM OR100E 01E App 61 Common Grop Common Group The commands in the common command group are specified in IEEE488 2 1987 These commands are independent of the dedicated commands used only with this recorder lt Space gt lt Space gt lt Space gt CLS ESR Function Clears the standard and extended event Function registers and the error queue Queries the standard event register value and clear the register Syntax CLS Syntax ESR Example CLS Example ESR 32 Description The output queue will also be cleared if Description lt NRf gt is the sum of the bits expressed as the CLS command is appended after the program message terminator ESE Function Sets Queries the value of the standard event enable register Syntax ESE lt NR gt ESE IDN lt NR gt 0 to 255 Function Example ESE 253 Syntax ESE 3253 Example Description lt NRf gt is the sum of the bits expressed as a decimal number This query allows you to determine what type of event occurred when a SRQ is in effect The standard event enable register is cleared by inquiring with ESR Queries the recorder model IDN IDN gt YOKOGAWA OR1O0E 0 F1 01 a decimal number Description gt A reply sequence is returned as The default value is ESE 0 all bits disabled The standard event enable register i
37. 20 50 100 200 400 800 1600 div OR100E long memory option and OR300E 10 20 50 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 div 1 Two channels are linked Only odd channels can be used 2 Four channels are linked Only one channel can be used Number of memory blocks Maximum 32 blocks Depends on installed memory memory length setting whether or not wave window trigger is used Time axis accuracy 0 02 Memory data output Display recording RS232 communication external memory through the PCMCIA T F Modem communication Auto functions Auto print auto display auto statistical calculation auto save external memory auto dial FAX modem Cursor functions l cursor Simultaneous display of measurement values on all channels 2 cursors Difference in time or measurement values on any channel or frequency Zoom in out function Time axis X2 x1 x1 2 to 1 1000 Zoom out factor varies according to the memory length Y axis x5 X2 x1 Xx2 3 x1 2 Cursor calculation function T Y mode Max Min Ave RMS area values in the range specified by the cursors X Y mode Area of the range specified by the cursors IM OR100E 01E 14 5 suoneoyioeds z 14 3 Recording Recording Section Printer type Thermal printer Chart paper Roll paper width 111 mm x 10 m Valid recording width 104 mm 832 dots Paper feed Accuracy 3 Chart speed 2 5 10 30 s div 1 2 5 10 30 min div 1 hour div
38. 761kUA ReAct P e5kvar P Fet 999 Harmonic order EAAOAACOAACACOAACOGCAACACOAGAAG AAAAACOGAACACOCACACOGCAACACOGCAA AAOACACOAACACOCACAOCOACQAOCOOGAA GJ EAAOAACOAACACOCAACOAAACOGAAS EAAOACACOGAACACOAACOCAAAAOAAW Frequency 56 Hz ESC Ei Even Save Print Fee eo ES ae Switching the harmonic order Note The information displayed for table1 is the same as when analyzing by specifying the range Waveform data outside the measurement range may not be measured accurately making exact analysis impossible Switching the harmonic order You can switch the display of the even harmonics and odd harmonics Pressing the F2 Odd Even key at the screen displaying the results of the analysis switches between the two 9 14 IM OR100E 01E 9 6 Analyzing Automatically When the parameter to be analyzed is RMS P Active Power kW 162 CH3 CH4 25 BAkW a 25 Hk TF t Harmonic order 184 H18 ee ea a pop fa Act P B TBAkW App P B TE1kKVA ReAct P 25kvar P Fet 999 Frequency 56 Hz ESC Los Save Print j Switching the horizontal axis Note The displayed information of RMS Content and Phase are the same as when analyzing by specifying the range Switching the time axis RMS value If the parameter to be analyzed is RMS you can switch the horizontal axis between linear and logarithmic
39. Gre lt lt Ty A 0x1021 If MSB is 1 take the XOR Shift the return CRC value App 74 IM OR100E 01E Index Index Symbols TEW up es voundvdscussveved E EAER 9 7 VES W o e EE RANT KNARE RAR 9 7 SFW ane h E E AA 9 7 A A D Converter T AGC Adapter ee r EEE accumulate display seeeseseeeeeseeeeeersestsreserseseerseseseee 6 7 Adjusting the Contrast ssssssssssssssesssesssisrereseeeee 2 19 Adjusting the position sseeseeeeeseeeeeseeeresrsrsesrerseseee 4 7 Alkaline Batteries 0 00 0 ccc ceeeeeceeesseeeeeees 2 11 analysis method o 0 c cee eeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeee 9 1 analyzing automatically 0 0 eens 9 14 ANDOR KN ee A heliia oie eae 5 3 Attaching the belt cccccecesesceceeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaeees 2 3 auto calCUlatiOns cecccusseisenuseiecccsnieressccunens 6 21 B paud Tate ses scis ra r S OIE 11 9 Bizslop tiggetiunonnnuse e e E E 1 8 BlOCK renimp nana 6 3 Block Diagram oscinina dessa 1 4 block to display eceseseeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereaee 6 13 BMP fil deni n EGS 12 5 C Calculating Statistics 20 eeeseeeeeeseeseeeeteeeeeeeees 6 20 changing the analysis condition 9 16 Changing the Measurement Range seceeeeeeee 3 4 Changing the Sample Rate 0 ec eeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeees 3 5 Channel Message serseri rinio i 6 11 Channel tecord saries irrena a a Ra e 6 11 chart speed 8 3 8 4 Cleaning the Printer Hea
40. HARMonic SYNChronize LEVel lt NR gt 100 to 100 Example TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE EVEL 10 TRIGGRE HRAMONIC SYNCHRONIZE EVEL TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE LEVEL 10 TRIGger LOAILOB Function Queries all setting values relating to the specified logic ch for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger LOA LOB LOA Logic Ach LOB Logic Bch Example TRIGGER LOA TRIGGER LOA TYPE AND PATTERN1 DONT PATTERN2 HIGH PATTERN3 UP PATTERN4 DOWN TRIGger LOAILOB PATTern lt X gt Function Sets Queries the logic trigger bit pattern of the specified logic ch for the normal trigger TRIGger LOA LOB PATTern lt X gt LOW HIGH UP DOWN DONT TRIGger LOA LOB PATTern lt X gt LOA Logic Ach LOB Logic Bch Syntax lt X gt 1 to 4 correspond to Bitl to 4 TRIGGER LOB PATTERN1 LOW TRIGGER LOB PATTERN1 TRIGGER PATTERN1 LOW Example TRIGger LOAILOB TYPE Function Sets Queries the trigger type of the specified logic ch for the normal trigger TRIGger LOA LOB TYPE OFF OR AND TRIGger LOA LOB TYPE LOA Logic Ach LOB Logic Bch TRIGGER LOA TYPE OR TRIGGER LOA TYPE TRIGGER LOA TYPE OR Syntax Example TRIGger LOGic Function Queries all setting values relating to the specified logic input for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger LOGic Example TRIGGER LOGIC TRIGGER LOGIC FILTER ON FCOUNT 1
41. Initialize To Next page OK Display language English Tag Off Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Key lock Display grid WW trg level change Start time End time Change level CH1 CH2 0 CH3 CH4 0 ESC Self test Go back to the previous screen Inval ia Valid You can start stop the operation set in the memory mode realtime memory mode or each of the harmonic modes by applying a TTL level signal or a contact signal to 12 12 IM OR100E 01E 12 9 Starting Stopping Measurement with External Signal Operating Procedure On the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next Page and press the F1 OK key The next page is displayed Set the Ext term start stop with the F1 Invalid or F2 Valid key Invalid Measurement is not started stopped even if a signal enters the trigger in terminal Valid Measurement is started stopped when a signal enters the trigger in terminal Input signal Two types of signals can be input TTL Level signal High Low High 2 7 V or more Low 0 8 V or less Contact signal Open Close About 5 mA of current flows when the contact is Close High or Open D Low or Close A A START STOP Note For connecting the input signal see page 2 5 Input circuit 5V 5V 4 7kQ 1009 100pF 74LS07 or l equivalent Maximum input vo
42. Memory Overview of operation Normally realtime record and start data capturing when trigger is detected Operation mode Single repeat Single After data capturing return to realtime recording Repeat After data capturing return to realtime recording and wait for trigger If the operation after data capturing is set to print output or FAX transmission the realtime recording is aborted after capturing the measurement data the data is displayed printed or sent over the FAX modem and the realtime recording is resumed 14 8 IM OR100E 01E 14 5 Trigger Normal Trigger Trigger source Analog channels 1 to 4 logic AB external trigger input manual timer Trigger mode Free single repeat Trigger combination condition AND or OR of each trigger condition Trigger type Analog channel Rise Fall High Low Bi slope Level window in out Logic channel AND or OR of the edge or level of each bit Trigger level setting 1 FS increment Trigger filter Filter or timeout except for bi slope Trigger delay 100 to 100 1 increment Wave Window Trigger Trigger mode Wave window single Wave window repeat Target frequency 50 60 Hz Trigger combination condition OR of each analog channel Method to create reference signal By specifying parameters or from the current input Reference signal parameter Amplitude width offset 1 increment phase 1 degree increment Trigger delay 100
43. N I PR PR FU INSTR 1 AS INT RANGE INT UNIT K2 INSTR K1 1 VAL MID PR INT FULL RET TURN a RANGE VAL MID A 1 K RANGE K1 INSTR K 1 A UNIT MID A K 1 K1 K 1 UNITS AS A K1 1 FULL Specify to read the range Read the range Read the unit Read the FULL value IM OR100E 01E App 73 gt 3 3 n 5 2 x Appendix 1 4 Sample Program Program to calculate CRC CCITT BR RK RK RK KK KK e e e e He TO TOI TO ITO ITO e e ITO IO k k K A e ke Program to calculate CRC CCITT BR RK RK e e e KK KK e e e e H H A A A e e e e e E IO ITO e e IO K ke ke k k k K CK unsigned short int CalccRC char data CRC is calculated int length the CRC int points int yf Area for storing the data on which the Number of data points for calculating cnt bit unsigned short int crc CLG x OE for cnt 0 cnt lt length cnt data points Loop counter for the data Loop counter for the bits CRC value Initialize CRC value Loop for the amount of cre unsigned short int data lt lt 8 Take XOR with the upper 8 bits for bit 0 if cre crocs y else Ces digit return crc bit lt 8 bit amp 0x8000 cre lt lt 1
44. Recording Format T Y recording Analog 4 ch logic 8 bit 1 2 4 zone recording Recording of each bit can be turned ON OFF individually on logic channel Digital recording Analog 4 ch logic Records measurement data in digital values X Y recording X axis fixed to channel 1 Recording style 8 div x 8 div 80 mm x 80 mm Recording style Dot Line selectable Printing Function Print items List setting scale unit time marker chart speed chart speed change position marker trigger detection position trigger time trigger detection channel grid channel No TAG and so on List List of setting parameters Grid Fine Simple off selectable Scale gage Prints the scale value and unit for each channel 14 6 IM OR100E 01E 14 3 Recording Time time print position Prints the time at the start of the recording and the time in 50 mm intervals Comments Prints character strings 20 characters ch or channel information every 100 mm intervals Chart speed Chart speed at the start of the recording chart speed change marker and the chart speed after the change Chart speed change position Prints the new chart speed Channel No Prints channel numbers or TAG name 7 characters ch on the waveform Record length 20 div 200 div 800 div continuous for L1 or L2 model Record line type Thin medium thick analog waveform IM OR100E 01E 14 7 suoneoyioeds z 14 4 Realtime Recorder amp
45. S Second Time HZ Hertz Frequency MHZ Megahertz Frequency lt Multiplier gt and lt Unit gt are not case sensitive U is used to indicate u lt Register gt is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed in the lt NRI gt form lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a data of specific characters mnemonic It is mainly used to indicate options and is chosen from character strings given in For interpretation rules see Header Interpretation Rules on page App 4 Form Example Ac Dc GND AC As with the header the COMMunicate VERBose command can be used to select a full response or an abbreviated response The COMMunicate HEADer command has no effect on lt character data gt App 6 IM OR100E 01E lt Boolean gt lt Boolean gt is a type of data that indicates ON or OFF and is expressed in one of the following forms Form Example ON OFF lt NRf gt ON OFF 1 0 When expressing lt Boolean gt in lt NRf gt form OFF is selected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected if the rounded integer is non 0 A response message is always 1 if the value is ON and 0 if it is OFF lt Character String Data gt lt Character string data gt is an arbitrary character string unlike the lt character data gt which uses only specific characters The character string must be enclosed in s
46. Trace off Thir Middle Recording the Captured Data After selecting the block on the playback screen pressing the PRINT key starts the recording For selecting the block see page 11 To set the recording range press the F1 Print key to display the screen for setting the recording range To specify the range with the cursor use the SCROLL CURSOR key Pressing the F4 Exec key starts the recording 3 00Ams 7 00ns eral eee be Start recording Select the recording range Select the start end data Go back to the previous screen 3 8 ms Out to T dams o inter Ce E la iad ena Go back to the previous screen Start recording Select Ie destination IM OR100E 01E 6 13 Bunnydes eead E 6 7 Recording the Captured Data as Digital Values Setting screen mMenu Mode Memory 4 kS s Format Azone Length 1 div Eee T scale Mag x1 32block Trigger kind Normal Memory clear OTF Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card DET 1 Print mode MASE Logic 123 4 44 2 4 Interval Idata CH A Gauge print On CH B B Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Wave Numer ic Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Operation Keys Displays the next
47. Waveli ndow CH_ Type Condition Interval Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Start time Off Show Reference wave On 10 38 Repeat g Single Operation Keys Displays reference signal Displays the setting menu Makes a selection fe Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 5 8 IM OR100E 01E 5 4 Setting the Wave Window Trigger Operating Procedure 1 Setting the kind of trigger Set the kind of trigger to WW Trg F2 key at the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed The time div setting available during wave window trigger is 2 5 or 10 ms div 2 Setting the trigger mode Set the trigger mode with the F1 to F3 keys at the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed Repeat Data is captured every time the trigger occurs Stops when the STOP key is pressed or when the internal memory becomes full See Single When the trigger occurs data is captured recorded once Free Pressing the START key starts the data capturing regardless of the trigger conditions Pressing the STOP key stops the data capturing 3 Setting the reference signal Select whether to base the reference signal off an ideal sine wave or an actual input signal Here select the actual input signal F2 key 4 Setting the trigger
48. can be attached to the lt NRf gt form The values are specified in any of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt SMV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt SE 3V lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt The following multipliers are available MA is used for Mega M to distinguish it from Mili except for Megahertz which is expressed as MHZ Hence M Mili cannot be used for Hertz If both lt Multiplier gt and lt Unit gt are omitted the default unit will be used Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR3 gt form The default unit is used without the lt Multiplier gt or the lt Unit gt lt Register gt lt Register gt is an integer and can be expressed in hexadecimal octal or binary besides decimal lt Register gt is used when each bit of a value has a particular meaning Itis expressed in one of the following forms Form Example lt NRf gt 1 H lt Hexadecimal value made up of digits 0 to 9 and A to F gt H07 0O lt Octal value made up of digits 0 to 7 gt q777 B lt Binary value made up of digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 Symbol Word Description EX Exa 10 8 PE PEPeta 10 T Tera 10 G Giga 10 MA Mega 10 K Kilo 10 M Mili 10 U Micro 10 N Nano 10 P Pico 10 F Femto 10 A Atto 107 lt Unit gt The following units are available Symbol Word Description V Volt Voltage
49. lt Space gt LSBFirst ai Nag CHANnel i lt Space gt EA lt NRf gt J LENGth A y D D O V gt A Q yi He OO J lt Space gt lt NRf gt J 4 TTIMe DATA DATA BLOCk Function Queries all settings relating to the output of Function Sets queries the block number of the the memory data waveform to be sent Syntax DATA Syntax DATA BLOCk lt NRf gt Example DATA DATA BLOCK 1 DATA BLOCk BYTEORDER LSBFIRST lt NR gt Block number 1 to 32 END 127999 FORMAT WORD Example DATA BLOCK 2 START 0 DATA BLOCK gt DATA BLOCK 2 IM OR100E 01E App 23 gt 3 ke 5 x DATA Group DATA BYTeorder Function Sets queries the byte order when sending data in word format Syntax DATA BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst DATA BYTeorder Example DATA BYTEORDER LSBFIRST DATA BYTEORDER DATA BYTEORDER LSBFIRST DATA CHANnel lt X gt RANGe Function Queries the measurement range and full scale value of the specified analog channel Syntax DATA CHANne1 lt X gt RANGe lt X gt 1 to 4 Example DATA CHANNEL1 RANGE 7500 MV 1400 Description Outputs lt range value gt lt range unit character string gt lt full scale value gt in that order DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing COEFficient Function Queries the scaling coefficient of the specified analog channel Syntax DATA C
50. signal IM OR100E 01E 5 1 5 2 Setting the Normal Trigger Setting Screen TRIGGER Operation Keys Menu Mode Memory 4 kS s Format Azone Length H ne T seale Mag 32 block 1 Trigger kind iii Se r Trigger 2 Mode 3 Delay 4 AND OR OR CA Type Level Filter NT Rise 50 on g 5 5 004 125ms l Fall 50 On 14 6 5 00V 275ms l Bislope bar 5 004 High 70 Timeout 8g T AAU 2 Q08ms A VEEN J 1234 E OR B itd Off off Ext trig Rise Start time On 18 Interval Off Free Single Repeat When the trigger conditions are consecutively satisfied the number of times of measurement indicated trigger occurs Time corresponding to the specified number of times of measurement Voltage value corresponding to the specified trigger level Triggers when the trigger conditions are not met within the specified number of times of measurement after the first trigger condition is met Displays the setting menu m Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections l Moves between setting parameters 5 2 IM OR100E 01E 5 2 Setting the Normal Trigger Operating Procedure 1 Setting the kind of trigger Set the kind of trigger to Normal F1 key at the screen that appears w
51. the data No are displayed or recorded on the time axis instead of the time of the data capture 12 6 IM OR100E 01E 12 4 Changing the Language of the Display You can select French Itarian German English or Japanese Setting Screen SYSTEM Copy action BMP file Expansion calc On Initial of To Next page OK Display language Tag Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Invalid Key lock Off Display grid On WW trg level Shanes off Start time 8 End time Change level CH1 CH2 0 CH3 CHA 0 ESC Go back to the Self test previous screen English saranese French German gt Operating Procedure Selecting the language of the display At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next page Press the F1 OK key to display the next page Select the Display language with the F1 English F2 Japanese F3 French F4 German or Next and F1 Itarian key IM OR100E 01E 12 7 suoli un4 sno ueLeueljl ISIN RI 12 5 Setting Tags Setting Screen When recording with the built in printer or by FAX you can record a tag instead of the channel number For setting the tag see 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments Copy action RMS Statis calc BMP file On To Next page Initialize SS Display language
52. 01E Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page MENU HARMonic Queries all the setting values relating to harmonic mode App 33 MENU HARMonic CHANnel Sets queries the channel to analyze automatically App 34 MENU HARMonic CYChe Sets queries the memory length for waveform analysis App 34 MENU HARMonic DISPlay Sets queries the contents to display for the automatic analysis App 34 MENU HARMonic FREQuency Sets queries the frequency of the harmonic mode App 34 MENU HARMonic METHod Sets queries the analysis method of the harmonic mode App 34 MENU HARMonic TRENd Queries all the setting values relating to the trend save of the App 34 automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt Queries all the setting values relating to the channel or power of App 35 the trend save of the automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt CONTent Sets queries whether or not to save the relative harmonic content App 35 during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt ORDer Sets queries which harmonic order to save during trend save of App 35 automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt PHASe Sets queries whether or not to save the phase during trend save of App 35 automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt
53. Block _ Set the calculation Makes a selection Moves between setting parameters Displays the captured data Operating Procedure Press the Playback key to display the loaded measurement data For measurement data that were saved to the flash ATA memory card while capturing data Measurement data that were saved to the flash ATA memory card while capturing data are displayed in units of 128 k The data that are displayed when the Playback key is pressed the first time are the most recent 128 k of data The following two methods are available to display other sections of the data 10 14 IM OR100E 01E 10 6 Displaying the Loaded Measurement Data Displaying 128 k of data before or after the data currently displayed With the flash ATA memory card inserted press the Next key at the waveform display screen This will open a screen used to select the data to be displayed Press either the F2 Previous or F3 Next key to load and display 128 k of data before or after the current data Displaying 128 k of data that includes the measured data captured at a specified time With the flash ATA memory card inserted press the Next key at the waveform display screen This will open a screen used to select the data to be displayed Pressing the F1 Select key displays a screen used to specify the data capture time Move the cursor to the appropriate position by pressing the
54. CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Memory Realtime Rea 1 Men F2 7 f w Y Y m TED ape efr rer 7 2 Setting the Recording Format of the Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 7 2 IM OR100E 01E 7 2 Setting the Recording Format of the Analog Waveform Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation mode Set the operation mode to Realtime with the F2 Realtime key 2 Setting the display recording format Set the display record format with the F1 to F4 keys 1 zone Display Record every channel in one zone 2 zone Display Record channels 1 and 2 to the upper zone and channels 3 and 4 to the lower zone 4 zone Display Record channels 1 2 3 and 4 in order from the top zone XY Display Record X Y See 7 4 Setting the X Y Recording Format 3 Setting the record length Select the record length with the F1 to F3 keys Continuous Record continuously 20 div 200 div Record 20 div or 200 div worth of measurement data 800 div is also available on the OR1IOOE L1 L2 models or OR300E 4 Setting record format Select the recording method with the F1 to F3 keys Off Display the waveform to the screen in realtime No recording Wave Record the waveform in realtime Numeric Record the digital values in realtime He
55. Cannot use lt Block data gt App 6 to App 57 181 Invalid outside macro OR100E does not support the macro functions definition specified in IEEE488 2 13 8 IM OR100E 01E 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Communication Execution Errors 200 to 299 Code Message Description Reference Page 221 Setting conflict Check the relevant setting parameters App 9 to App 57 222 Data out of range Check the setting range App 9 to App 57 223 Too much data Check the data byte length App 9 to App 57 224 Illegal parameter value Check the setting range App 9 to App 57 241 Hardware missing Check the availability of options 260 Expression error Cannot use an equation 270 Macro error OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 272 Macro execution error OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 273 Illegal macro label OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 275 Macro definition too long OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 276 Macro recursion error OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 277 Macro redefinition not OR100E does not support the macro functions allowed specified in IEEE488 2 278 Macro header not found OR100E does not support the macro functions specified in IEEE488 2 280 The password cannot The p
56. FAX Modem Operating Procedure 1 Setting the communication port Select the communication port with the F1 RS232 or F2 Modem key Here select F2 Modem key to select the FAX modem 2 Setting the baud rate Set the baud rate with the F1 to F4 keys Pressing NEXT displays the next set of selections Select the baud rate from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 3 Setting the FAX number Set the destination telephone number Set the destination telephone number in telephone number 1 For telephone number 2 set a backup destination telephone number that is used when a connection cannot be established to telephone number 1 the line is busy for example Note If your phone system requires you to dial additional numbers prefix to access an outside line place a comma between these and the actual phone number If it takes a long time to connect to the outside number place several commas 4 Setting the telephone line Select the telephone line to use with the F1 Pulse or F2 Tone Pulse Pulse dialing Tone Tone dialing 5 Setting the header Set the header using 20 characters or less The characters are recorded at the head of the FAX message 6 Entering AT commands You can enter up to two AT commands at once Enter the command using the alphabet and symbols For information on the AT commands see the instruction manual for the FAX modem Note AT commands are c
57. For example when the built in battery has run out an error occurs and its error No 113 and message Undefined header will be stored in the error queue The contents of the error queue can be read using the STATus ERRor query As with the output queue messages are read oldest first newest last refer to the previous page If the error queue becomes full the final message will be replaced by message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again To see whether the error queue is empty or not check bit 2 EAV of the status byte App 70 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 4 Sample Program Appendix 1 4 Sample Program Output measured data in ASCII format 100 BR RRR ARK I RK TK TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR TR IK IK 110 Output measured data in ASCII format 120 130 Communication protocol 140 Data length 8 bits Parity none 150 Stop bit 1 bit 160 BR RRR RR KIRK IR IR TR TR TR TOR IR TR TORO TOR IK IK 170 180 OPEN COM1 N81NN AS 1 Open RS 232 interface 190 OPEN MEMASC DAT FOR OUTPUT AS 2 Open file to save measurement data 200 210 Clear the extended event and set an event to occur at the end of the data sample 220 PRINT 1 STATUS FILTER1 FALL STATUS EESR 230 LINE INPUT 1 S 240 PRINT 1 TRIGG
58. Handling Precautions General Precautions on Handling Input Terminals Do not bring any objects charged with static electricity near the input terminals It may damage the internal circuit Do not apply shock to the input terminals The shock may be converted to electric noise and may enter the recorder Display Screen Remove the protective film covering the LCD after having set up the recorder The lifetime of the LCD is about 10 000 operating hours Operation beyond this point may cause the back lighting brightness to go down In this case you need to replace the display Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual to have your LCD replaced Cleaning Numerous plastic parts are used on this recorder Use a dry soft cloth for cleaning the recorder Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzene or thinner as these may cause discoloration or deformation Protecting the Case and Operation Panel Do not apply volatile chemicals to the case or the operation panel Do not allow rubber or vinyl to remain in contact with the case or the operation panel for extended periods of time Doing so may cause damage to the recorder When Moving the Recorder Ensure that the power cord and input cables are disconnected Use both hands to carry the recorder Moving the recorder with the chart loaded may disturb the chart setting If you move the recorder with the chart loaded check that the chart is loaded prop
59. Low level Triggers when the signal is the trigger level or below Bi slope Triggers when Rise or Fall is satisfied Win_out Triggers when the signal exits the window Win_in Triggers when the signal enters the window 6 Setting the trigger level Set the trigger level as a percentage of the measurement range with the F1 to F4 keys Set a positive trigger level on channels that have the input set to RMS on the OR300E 7 Setting the filter Set the filter with the F1 to F3 keys Off Disable the filter function On Triggers when the trigger conditions are consecutively satisfied the specified number of times of measurement Timeout Triggers when the trigger conditions are not satisfied within the specified number of times of measurement IM OR100E 01E 5 3 Bunebb6uy pe 5 3 Setting the Logic Trigger and Other Triggers Setting Screen ems div Menu Mode 4 kS s Memory Format Azone Length 1Adiv Ene T scale Mag x1 32block 1 TtTrigger kind TRIGGER m Fei o o o Oo Mode Delay D AND OR OR CH Type Level Filter Rise 50 on 6 5 80y 125ms Fall 50 On 12 5 V 275ms E Bislope 50 O 5 00 High 70 Timeout 88 7 V 2 ms ott 1234 E OR itd Off off 3 Ext trig Rise 4 H Start time On 10 5 7 Interval Off Free Single Repeat Operation Keys Displays t
60. MENU HARMONIC CHANNEL1 ORDER ODD3TO9 METHOD WAVE MENU HARMONIC TREND Description Valid only when the trend save is effective CHANNEL1 ORDER gt MENU MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt ese eT E TEA ORDER ODD3TO9 POWer lt X2 gt CONTent Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Description Valid only when the trend save is effective MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt 1 POWer lt X2 gt PHASe Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Sets queries whether or not to save the relative harmonic content during trend save of automatic analysis Syntax MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt CONTent lt Boolean gt Function Sets queries whether or not to save the phase during trend save of automatic i analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd Syntax MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt CONTent CHANnel lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 2 Example MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 CONTENT OFF MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 CONTENT MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 CONTENT 0 PHASe lt Boolean gt MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt PHASe lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 2 Example MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 PHASE ON MENU HARMONIC TREND CH
61. Off CH print z OFF Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin 1zone zone Azone xY i Same as the display format Displays the setting menu r Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections L Moves between setting parameters Display the captured data 6 10 IM OR100E 01E 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Operating Procedure Recording Format of the Analog Waveform 1 Setting the recording mode Set the recording mode with F1 Wave key or F2 Numeric key Here press the F1 key to select Wave 2 Setting the record length Set the record size with the F1 to F3 keys Continuous Record at 10 mm div the same time axis zoom factor as the displayed waveform A4 Record so that it fits in the length of an A4 size paper AS Record so that it fits in the length of an A5 size paper A4 and A5 are valid when the recording range is All If the recording range is Cursor the record size is set to continuous See page 6 13 on the recording range 3 Setting the gauge record Select whether or not to record the scale at the end of the recording 4 Setting the grid Set the grid type Off Do not record the grid Simple Record only the base line Fine Record thin lines 5 Setting the time record Set whether or not to record t
62. Out on the Displayed Waveform z Displaying the C rSOt oerein ces theese R Na Calculating Statisties ioa denn aio a a O E E RAA Turning Expansion Calculation ON and the results of the area calculation 6 24 Chapter 7 Realtime Displaying Recording 7 1 7 2 73 7 4 7 5 7 6 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 Chapter 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 Chapter 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 Setting Parameters oreesa a a eo an Anata esi ERRA 7 1 Setting the Recording Format of the Analog Waveform eseseseseseseeeeeeerreeeeresererereen 7 2 Setting the Recording Format of the Digital Values 0 ccc eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 7 5 Setting the X Y Recording Format 0 cc cece ssceecseeecsecsceeeseeecsecseeecseeeseeseneeseeeeaes 7 6 Startins Stoppt eini kien anid Ave nites eae ete a ae 7 7 Displaying Recording the Captured Data otc esceseseeseeeeseeeceeaeeesseeeeeeaeees 7 10 Data Capturing While Realtime Recording Settinie Parameters wean anaa hte tien aliens ie ai aad eels 8 1 Setting the Realtime Memory Mode 0 cccceecesesceseseeseseeseeseseeecseeseeeseeassesaeeeens 8 2 Startine Stoppins s ae oeie eR dou teh er ent ia de headers dauevensbthescecrupedsaconenieioks 8 4 Displaying the Captured Data 0 0 ceesceseseescesceeseeesseesesecsceeseeecsesaceesseeseesaeeeens 8 5 Harmonic Analysis Settins Parameters niani i e A E E eiaha 9 1 Connecting Cables for P
63. Press the F2 Cursor key on the playback screen It will display cursor A solid line or cursor A and cursor B dotted line 2 Displaying Clearing cursor B Pressing the F2 B key toggles the display of cursor B 3 Moving the cursor Select the cursor to move by pressing the F3 A B A amp B key several times This operation is not necessary if cursor B is not displayed Move the cursor with the SCROLL CURSOR key A Move cursor A only B Move cursor B only A amp B Move cursors A and B If cursor B is not displayed the screen displays the measured value and the measured time at the cursor A position If cursor B is displayed the screen displays the difference between the measured values the time difference between A and B and the frequency calculated from the time difference Displays Hz when the frequency is below 0 001 Hz IM OR100E 01E 6 19 Bundes ea E 6 10 Calculating Statistics Setting Screen Cursor display screen an P lH BACK 2 000 EME 11 975ms ex1 ems div Block 3232 Print cursor Block I calc I gt Calculation screen Calculation screen K PEE E Start data cursor End data cursor amr for el aoa ie Select start end points of the calculation range set with the cursor Pa eg ee 3 888 ms Cal area E T 8ams OTotal Go back tothe T Esc Execute calculat
64. Record all the captured data Display Record the range currently displayed Press the F3 Destination key to select the record destination Printer Record with the built in printer FAX Record over FAX modem If FAX is selected the FAX modem need to be set at the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed For details see 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data with the FAX Modem Pressing the F4 Exec key starts the recording IM OR100E 01E 7 11 7 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data 2 Reading the measurement data with the cursor Pressing the F2 Cursor key displays the cursor display screen 00 35 49 BOI 10s div 2 88U A 2 194 off off t Measured value at the cursor position Go back to the e previous screen position Time at the cursor DEM Select the measurement value to display About MIN MAX Display of the captured data of realtime recording The OR100E OR300E displays 40 points in 1 div in the time axis direction On the other hand the sample rate during realtime recording is 400 kS s and the maximum chart speed is 2 s div which results in at least 800 k points of measured data in 1 div This means that multiple points of measured data exist at the same time position The maximum and minimum values of the measured data at the same time position are used for displaying and recording on this recorder Th
65. Setting the Trigger Trigger mode Free Capture the data regardless of the trigger Single Capture one block of data once after the trigger Repeat Capture one block of data after every trigger Trigger delay Trigger Mode Delay AND OR Trigger using AND or OR Trigger condition for each channel In the above example the trigger occurs in the following cases 2 V 10 of the measurement range Trigger point Trigger level In addition you can set a delay to start the data capturing before or after the trigger point Trigger point Range captured to memory Memory length Spores seat ecr emis Pesa creases aie Trigger level When delay is 0 Range captured to memory Memory length Trigger level When delay is 10 Range captured to memory X 10 of the memory length X When delay is 10 __X Range captured to memory x 10 of the memory length Note If a trigger is set measurement data is not captured until the trigger condition is satisfied 3 6 IM OR100E 01E 3 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data The data that was captured by pressing the START key is displayed or recorded PLAY BACK Pressing the Playback key displays the current block of the measurement data IF 4 a a O A M 6 98755 x 1s div Block 31 32 Print erso Btook e
66. Tag Ext term start stop Key lock Display grid WW trg level change Start time End time Change level Manual trigger key CHI CH am Valid Invalid Off On off 0 CH2 0 0 CH4 0 ESC Self test e oom TT Operating Procedure Turning ON the tag Go back to the previous screen At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next page Press the F1 OK key to display the next page Set the Tag to On with the F2 On key Note The toggling of the Tag affects all channels 12 8 IM OR100E 01E 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments You can set tags and comments for each channel To record the tags and comments set the CH message or CH record to ON at the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed For details see 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Also to validate the tags Turn ON the tag as described in 12 5 Recording Tags Setting Screen i l DIY ADIL to Input Fi hae Null Seal ing DC Voff Off Vj amp Comm Comment SamplB Tag ef ESC Go back to the previous screen Deletes the previous Inserts a character Switches upper lower case letters character Back space before the character input position Operating Procedure Setti
67. a serial poll is performed or when MSS changes to 0 Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not cause an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that no service will be requested even if an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to 0 This can be done using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE Operation of the Status Byte A service request is issued when bit 6 of the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 becomes 1 when any of the other bits becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit in the service request enable register becomes 1 For example if an event takes place and the logical OR of each bit of the standard event register and the corresponding bit in the enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB will be set to 1 In this case if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS will be set to 1 thus requesting service from the controller It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred by reading the contents of the status byte App 66 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Reading from the Status Byte The following two methods are provided for reading the status byte Inquiry using the STB query Making an inquiry using the ST
68. and the message terminators IM OR100E 01E App 7 xipueddy E Controller Synchronization with the Controller Synchronization methods There are cases when events other than communication events such as trigger occurrence that cause a command sent later to be executed before the completion of a command sent earlier For example if you want to query measurement data captured using single trigger mode sending the following command would not suffice The command DATA CHANne11 SEND is executed whether or not the capturing has completed and may result in command execution error TRIGger MODE SSINgle STARt DATA CHANne11 SEND lt PMT gt To overcome this problem following methods can be used to synchronize to the end of the data capturing Using STATus CONDition query STATus CONDition is a command for querying the contents of the condition register Whether the data capturing is in progress or not can be determined by reading bit 0 of the condition register If bit 0 is 1 data capturing is in progress If it is 0 data capturing is stopped Example TRIGger MODE SINGLe ACTion STARt1 lt PMT gt STATus CONDition lt PMT gt Read the response If bit 0 is 1 go back one line DATA CHANne11 SEND will not be executed until bit 0 of the condition register becomes 0 Using CoMMunicate WAIT command COMMunicate WAIT is a command used to wait for certain event
69. battery voltage to drive the 2 11 recorder Replace the AAA batteries or 2 15 recharge the rechargeable battery 2 16 630 Modem card not ready There is no modem card for sending the 11 10 FAX Insert the modem card firmly in 11 11 the slot 632 Can t use this modem This modem card cannot be used with 11 10 card this recorder Use a modem card 11 11 supported by this recorder 633 Can t initialize modem Reinsert the modem card If it still does 11 11 not work change to another modem card 634 Can t send fax You cannot send fax under the following 11 10 conditions to Not properly connected to the phone line 11 13 Incorrect telephone number Not enough wait for dialing to the outside line Add commas between the prefix and the phone number Unstable phone line 635 Connection failure Failed to connect due to the following reason 11 10 Phone number is not specified to Destination Busy after four redials 11 13 650 PC card not ready Flash ATA card is not inserted 10 2 Insert the card firmly in the slot 651 Card unformatted Flash ATA card is not formatted to MS DOS Format the card with a personal computer IM OR100E 01E 13 3 Hunooys jqnolL Buns pue esoueuajuley 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Error Error Message Description and Corrective Reference Page Code Measures 653 Specified file unavailable Cannot find the specified
70. by the time div setting even during realtime recording as in the memory mode It is not fixed to 400 kS s IM OR100E 01E 8 4 Displaying the Captured Data As in the memory mode you can display the captured data read the measurement value with the cursor and make statistical calculations See the sections listed below 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Recording the Captured Data as Digital Values Zooming In or Out on the Displayed Waveform Displaying the Cursor Calculating Statistics IM OR100E 01E Hulpsoo90y owiyjeoy llyM Burunjdeg eread Chapter 9 Harmonic Analysis 9 1 Setting Parameters The parameters shown below will be set in this chapter The screen for setting parameters is the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Waveform Analysis Harmonic Analysis from an arbitrary point Conditions on capturing the measurement data Setting parameters Description Operation mode Set to Harmonic Analysis method Set to Wave Frequency Set the frequency of the power supply being measured Memory length Set how many cycles of data to capture Kind of Trigger Select normal trigger or wave window trigger Clear memory at start Select whether or not to clear the measured data captured previously at the start of the measurement Condition to stop repeat trigger When the trigger mode is rep
71. contents of the channel print Syntax MENU CPRint lt Boolean gt MENU CPRint Example MENU CPRINT OFF MENU CPRINT gt MENU CPRINT 0 Qa T TODT E A e T Ob gt CAE e E oO Cy w O p U A gt Q O gt 3 ke 5 x MENU Group MENU HARMonic CHANnel valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Sets queries the channel to analyze automatically MENU HARMonic CHANnel lt NRf gt MENU HARMonic CHANnel lt NRf gt 1 to 4 MENU HARMONIC CHANNEL 1 MENU HARMONIC CHANNEL MENU HARMONIC CHANNEL 1 MENU HARMonic CYCLe valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to waveform analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the memory length for waveform analysis MENU HARMonic CYCLe lt NRf gt MENU HARMonic CYCLe lt NR gt 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 MENU HARMONIC CYCLE 5 MENU HARMONIC CYCLE gt MENU HARMONIC CYCLE 1 MENU HARMonic DISPlay Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the contents to display for the automatic analysis Syntax MENU HARMonic DISPlay TABLE1 RMS CONTent PHASe TABLE2 PRMS PCONtent PPH
72. corresponds to the MENU key OF J lt Space gt fC CPRint gt lt Space gt OFF lt Space gt lt Space gt App 28 IM OR100E 01E DISPlay MENU Group lt Space gt TABLE1 CONTent TABLE2 CONtent PHase AUTO TICLE WAVE AUTO ce TOER crm Com ORDer Dan lt Space gt bee vant Er TOTal lt Space gt OFF END lt Space gt OFF T ENTime ae lt Character a IM OR100E 01E App 29 gt 3 3 5 x MENU Group lt Space gt lt Space gt lt Space gt LiNear SP2W12 lt Space gt Character string gt lt Space gt LOPRint lt Space gt MBLength MINTerval lt Space gt C come MEMory REALTime D REALMem g e App 30 IM OR100E 01E MENU Group a a MPRint lt Space gt WG MSTAtis lt Space gt te USEC500 MSEC1 MSEC2 MSEC5 MSEC10 MSEC20 MSEC50 MSEC100 MSEC200 MSEC500 EC1 EC2 EC5 C Ey Ga e e a a bead EC10 E EC30 m EXTernal i lt NRf gt PLAYback lt Space gt PLENgth CONTinu
73. delay Set the Pre trigger trigger delay as a percentage of the memory length 100 to 1 is pre trigger and 1 to 100 is trigger delay 5 Setting the frequency Select 50 60 Hz according to the measurement signal 6 Setting the synchronous trigger Set the trigger synchronous trigger to synchronize the start of the wave window trigger Select the source channel of the synchronous trigger from the measurement input Select Rise of Fall for the trigger condition Set the trigger level as a percentage of the measurement range of the source channel of the synchronous trigger 7 Setting ON OFF Set the wave window trigger to ON OFF for each channel 8 Setting the width of the wave window Set the width of the wave window as a percentage of the measurement range 9 Setting the time trigger For information about the time trigger setting see page 5 5 Note Highlighting Show Reference wave and pressing F1 Go displays the wave window To go back to the setting screen press the F1 Back key IM OR100E 01E 5 9 Bunebb6uy pe 5 5 Triggering with the Manual Trigger Key You can capture one block of measurement data by pressing the Manual Trigger key even if the specified trigger condition is not met Setting Screen Copy action Expansion calc BMP file Off To Next page i Cao aa Display language Tag English Off Manu
74. difference of voltage phase angle and current phase angle of the specified measurement data on the bar graph and displays the active power reactive power apparent power and power factor with digital values Table2 Displays the active power relative power content power phase angle for each harmonic order of the specified measurement data on the graph and displays the active power reactive power apparent power and power factor with digital values Off Does not display the results of the analysis 5 Setting the channel and wiring method If you selected RMS Content Phase or Table1 in step 4 select the channel If you selected RMS P Cont P Phase P select the measurement data with the wiring method 1 2W 1 2 Measurement data of channels 1 and 2 connected in single phase two wire 1 2W 3 4 Measurement data of channels 3 and 4 connected in single phase two wire 193W Measurement data of channels 1 to 4 connected in single phase three wire 393W Measurement data of channels 1 to 4 connected in three phase three wire IM OR100E 01E s s j euy 2luowJeH 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data 6 Setting the unit If you selected RMS or RMS P in step 4 set the unit on the time axis Select either F1 linear or F2 log key Linear Display on linear scale Log Display on logarithmic scale Setting the condition to stop the repeat trigger Set only when the trigger is set to repeat S
75. e 3 3 2 9 o 5 H c 5 ot e 5 D IM OR100E 01E 11 17 11 9 Other Fax Modem Functions Connecting the OR100E OR300E to a personal computer with the FAX modem allows you to communicate with the OR100E OR300E just as you would with the RS 232 interface For details on the RS 232 commands see the appendix Setting the OR100E You can configure the OR100E OR300E using the communication commands for the RS 232 interface However you cannot do the following Turning the recorder ON OFF Setting the communication parameters Scrolling the waveform Performing operations dealing with the cursor Outputting data OR100E outputs setup data measurement data status data and error codes If the phone line is disconnected while outputting the data the OR100E OR300E will be busy until it outputs all of the data Reconnect after all of the data has been output Note In the initial OR100E OR300E setting OR100E OR300E will answer an incoming call automatically when it detects two alert signals To change the number of alert signals before answering an incoming call set the following initial command To answer after 5 alert signals ATSO 5 Setting the parameters To set the communication parameters see 11 7 Setting the FAX Modem Passwords If you set a password using the communication command only the command for entering the password PASSword INPut and the command to output the status data are ac
76. e Installing the recorder in a location with mechanical vibration will not only adversely affect the mechanical parts but may cause improper recording Attaching the belt When using the accessory belt attach it as shown in the following figure There are two places on the top section of the recorder for attaching the belt Make sure to attach the belt firmly at the two places IM OR100E 01E 2 3 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable Connecting the Input Signal cable The input signal cable for measurement is connected to the input terminals located on the right side of the recorder The number of input channels varies according to the model as follows OR122 OR322 2 channels OR142 OR342 4 channels The input terminal is a bipolar safety terminal for the banana plug Connect the input signal cable as shown below Low High Measurement input cable To avoid electric shock always use the accessory measurement input cable to connect to the input terminals Input impedance is about 1 MQ The signal source resistance including the input signal line resistance should be less than 500 Q If it exceeds 500 Q a bias current of about 2 nA will flow Beware of the measurement errors Never allow the floating voltage to exceed 500 Vrms CAT II If voltages exceeding this floating voltage are applied to the input terminal it may damage the input circuit Never allow the measurement input voltage voltage difference betw
77. file 10 8 to Check the file name 10 13 654 Invalid file name Tried to use a file name that cannot be used or Chapter 10 tried to use invalid characters or symbols 655 No data to save or no measurement data in the specified range 10 5 Save after capturing data or change the range to save 656 No data to load There is no data in the specified file 10 8 to 10 11 657 Not enough space to save There is not enough free space on the flash 10 12 ATA card Delete unnecessary files or save to 10 13 another card 658 Directory full Maximum number of files allowed in the root 10 12 directory has been exceeded Delete 10 13 unnecessary files or save to another card 659 Invalid file format OR100E does not support this file format 660 Invalid format version OR100E does not support this file format version 662 Write protected file The file is write protected Cannot overwrite or delete the file Clear the write protection with a personal computer 663 Access error Card was removed during loading or saving 10 1 10 2 or the card is physically damaged Insert a proper card 664 File system error Other file system error Insert another flash 10 2 ATA card or format the card with a personal computer 665 File exists A file with a same file name already exists 10 5 Delete the file or save with another file name 10 12 667 File is corrupt Cannot load the specified file because it is corrupt 668 No harmonic data There are no
78. gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups Include a colon before the header if the following command does not belong to the same group as the preceding command Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC MENU MODE MEMORY When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are independent of hierarchy colon is not necessary before a common command Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC CLS TRIGGER MODE FREE IM OR100E 01E App 3 gt 3 3 5 x Commands When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If a terminator is used to separate two commands each command is a separate message Specify the command header for each command even when the commands from the same command group are being concatenated Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC lt PMT gt CHANNEL1 RANGE 20V lt PMT gt Upper level Query A query with a question mark on the top most level command in a group is called an upper level query Executing an upper level query allows all the setting parameters in the group to be received at once Some query groups comprising more than three hierarchical levels output all their lower level settings Example CHANNEL1 lt PMT gt gt CHANNEL1 INPUT DC RANGE 10 000E 00 NULL OFF A response to an upper level query can be sent exactly as it was received as a program message to the recorder This allows the settings that existed at the time of the
79. gt 1 25E 5 lt data byte string gt Indicates the measured value The he s WORD size measurement values are Description Cannot query during measurement listed for each data No DATA LENGth lt CRC gt Function Queries the total number of data points of 2 byte CRC value the specified waveform CRC is a way to check the data by Syntax DATA LENGth considering all the data to be an array of Example DATA LENGTH 1000 bit values and determining the remainder by dividing with a specific value CRC CCITT CRC ITU T It is calculated by using the divisor 0x11021 X 6 X X5 1 DATA LOAILOB INPut Function Queries the ON OFF condition of each bit of the specified logic channel Syntax DATA LOA LOB INPut LOA Logic Ach LOB Logic Bch DATA STARt Example DATA LOA INPUT 3 Function Sets queries which point of the specified Description The sum of the following bits is output in 1 waveform is to be the first data byte integer decimal Syntax DATA STARt lt NRf gt FE 09 Did 2k 20 DATA STARt plese latest lt NRf gt Data number 0 to Bits 0 to 3 correspond to bit 1 to bit 4 of the 127999 logic input 128kW CHModel 0 to 511999 Indicates the ON OFF setting of the Example DATA START 100 display recording of each bit DATA START DATA START 100 oe DATA TRIGger Function Queries the trigger point of the specified DATA LOAILOB SEND waveform Function Sends the data o
80. headers that can be sent from the controller to the recorder They differ in the format of their program headers Common Command Header Commands defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below An asterisk always precedes a common command H lt Mnemonic gt An example of a common command CLS Compound Header Dedicated commands designed to be used only with this recorder are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The format of a compound header is shown below A colon is used to specify a lower level header An example of a compound header CHANNEL1 NULL OFF Note A mnemonic is a character string made up of alphanumeric characters Commands When Concatenating Commands Command Group A command group is a group of commands which have the same compound header A command group may contain sub groups Example Commands relating to system SYSTEM SYSTEM CLOCK SYSTEM CACTion SYSTEM CLOCK DATE SYSTEM EXTernal SYSTEM CLOCK TIME When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group This recorder stores the hierarchical level of the command which is currently being executed and performs analysis on the assumption that the next command will also belong to the same level Therefore you may omit the header if the commands belong to the same group Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC RANGE 100V lt PMT
81. key is pressed If you wish to keep a record of the time at which the data capture is started use a manual trigger to start the operation In some cases even when data capturing is stopped with the STOP key it may take 10 to 100 seconds before the operation actually stops IM OR100E 01E 10 11 10 5 Loading the Measurement Data Setting Screen FILE m Save Load gt PC Card 9MByte 1 Mode 2 Funct ion Load 3 File name 4 Execute Operation Keys Data Panel T ar naga eq D amp c ea m GD e C ID E AET e r sr Makes a selection Moves between setting parameters Displays the setting menu 10 12 IM OR100E 01E 10 5 Loading the Measurement Data Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the data Select the data type with the F1 Data or F2 Panel key Select F1 Data key to select measurement data 2 Setting the function Select the operation Select F3 Load Note The OR100E OR300E cannot load files that were saved in ASCII format 3 Selecting the filename A list of files that can be loaded is displayed Select the file with the F1 T or F2 1 key Pressing the F4 Info key displays information about the selected file File name TEST1 6B Trigger time 9 1 01 00 01 04 Sample rate 16 kS s 5 us div
82. line Point Display the measurement points as points 3 Setting the Y axis Select the channel to assign to the Y axis X axis is fixed to channel 1 6 8 IM OR100E 01E 6 5 Starting Stopping Operating procedure 1 Starting the measurement Pressing the START key starts the measurement The waveform is displayed on the screen according to the format set in sections 6 3 and 6 4 If the trigger mode is set to anything other than FREE Waiting for trigger message is displayed on the lower left of the screen Sep 02 97 23 32 Ground level for each Re AS A DUA P E EOE AE ME SS E DEE A A E A D a OY re channel sf de A ee de 4 Channel number already captured 1 EEE DE I ESAE NEO AET VE ENAC POESIE EENET CEON o J D mr 9 A S S S O D 3 pel x p a a 3 Q Message 4 indicating J the present 4 condition y Number blocks Sampl ing TOW Zoom factor ems div Blockt 12 22 Total number of blocks ox of the time axis il 1W DIUI CE 1U DIU So ig IWeDIUILY UeDIU BBBRBSBRRS is an open block V DIV of each E is an used block channel Note e You cannot change any other settings besides the input coupling and the filter during a data capture If the input coupling or the filter is changed it is reflected in the next data capture block e If you change the input type during data capturing the NULL
83. line 11 12 that you are using If your phone system requires you to dial additional 11 12 numbers to access an outside line place a comma between these and the actual phone number Check that the destination is set to FAX 11 14 The chart has jammed Remove the jammed paper as follows 2 19 2 20 Turn OFF the power switch Lift the release lever Remove the paper The chart does not feed Check if the recorder has run out of paper 2 19 2 20 e Check that the release lever is down 2 19 2 20 Screen display is dark Pressing the back light key darkens the screen display 1 3 Screen display automatically darkens while recording with the built in printer This is not a malfunction 13 2 IM OR100E 01E 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures This section describes error messages warning messages and status messages displayed by the recorder It also describes corrective measures to deal with the problems indicated by the messages If the recorder needs servicing or the condition does not improve after taking the corrective measures contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual Error Messages Error Error Message Description and Corrective Reference Page Code Measures 600 Out of chart paper Out of chart paper 2 19 2 20 Load new roll chart 601 Printhead raised Lower the release lever 2 19 2 20 603 Low battery Not enough
84. message did not contain any queries e If the previous message contained a query you cannot send the next message until the entire response message is received If you do send a message an error will occur and the response message that was not received will be discarded e If the controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error will occur This also applies if the controller tries to receive a response message before it is done sending the program message e If a program message contains multiple units and some of the units are incomplete this recorder will attempt to pick up the complete units and execute them However these attempts may not always be successful and some responses may not be returned even if the program message contained queries Dead lock This recorder has buffer memories for program and response messages Each buffer has at least 1024 bytes of area The number of bytes available will vary depending on the operating condition of the recorder If both memories become full at the same time the recorder becomes inoperative This condition is called a dead lock To resume the operation discard the response message Dead lock will not occur if the size of the program message including the PMT is kept below 1024 bytes Dead lock never occurs if the program message does not contain a query App 2 IM OR100E 01E Commands Commands There are two types of commands program
85. of oa bit Bits 0 to 3 correspond to bit 1 to bit 4 of the logic input B Indicates the ON OFF setting of the display recording of each bit Bits 8 to 11 correspond to bit 1 to bit 4 of the logic input 0 OFF 1 ON App 42 IM OR100E 01E PASSword Group SELFtest Gorup PASSword Group The commands in the PASSWord group set or query password parameters They are valid only during modem communication ee ee Ginter Sra RE O lt Space gt lt NRf gt PASSword PASSword INPut Function Enters the password PASSword CHANge Function Changes the password Syntax PASSword CHANge Syntax PASSword INPut lt NRf gt lt NR gt lt NRf gt lt NRE gt 0 to 9999 lt NR gt lt NR gt lt OLD Example PASSWORD INPUT 100 password lt NEW password gt lt NR gt 0 to 9999 However 0 is considered no password Password can be changed only if the OLD password is correct Example PASSWORD CHANGE 0 1234 Discription The default value is 0 password not used SELFtest Gorup The commands in the SELFtest group are used to perform testing SELFtest eons SELFtest MEMory SELFtest PCCard Function Performs memory test and query the result Function Performs PC card test and query the result Syntax SELFtest MEMory Syntax SELFtest PCCard Example SELFTEST MEMORY gt 2 Example SELFTEST PCCARD gt 0 Description If it pa
86. of the condition register changes from 0 to ey Fall The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 Both The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit of the condition register changes from 0 to aa bees or from 1 to 0 Never The bit of the extended event register is disabled and always 0 IM OR100E 01E App 69 xipueddy E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Output Queue and Error Queue Overview of the Output Queue The output queue is provided to store response messages to queries For example when the WAVeform SEND query is sent to request output of the acquired waveform the response data will be stored in the output queue until it is read out The example below shows that data is stored record by record in the output queue and is read out oldest item first newest item last The output queue is emptied in the following cases in addition to when read out is performed When a new message is received from the controller When dead lock occurs When power is turned ON again The output queue cannot be emptied using the CLS command To see whether the output queue is empty or not check bit 4 MAV of the status byte gt gt D2 gt D1 D1 D2 D1 Overview of the Error Queue The error queue stores the error No and message when an error occurs
87. one OR122 OR322 512k awe gt 256 k we gt 128 k 128 k CH1 CH2 256 k CH1 512k CH1 OR142 0R342 512 k gt 256 k 128 k 128k CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 256 k CH1 CH3 512 k CH1 For logic channels channel B cannot be used only when the maximum memory capacity is 512 K IM OR100E 01E Bundes ea E 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data Memory length The relationship between the memory length and the number of data points that is saved in one block is as follows Memory length Number of data points captured in memory 10 div 800 data points 20 div 1600 data points 50 div 4000 data points 100 div 8000 data points 200 div 16000 data points 400 div 32000 data points 800 div 64000 data points 1600 div 128000 data points 3200 div 256000 data points 6400 div 512000 data points 1 Two channels are linked Only odd channels can be used 2 Four channels are linked Only one channel can be used 3 Setting the kind of trigger Select the kind of trigger with the F1 and F2 keys See chapter 5 Setting the Trigger 4 Setting how to handle the memory at the start of the data capture Select ON or OFF with the F1 and F2 keys On Clear the measurement data captured previously Off Capture the data to the next block after the previous data 5 Setting the condition to stop the repeat
88. print On CHE 6 BBA Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Memory Rea 1t ime Reat rem Harmonic Displays the setting menu Makes a selection fee Displays the next Operation Keys set of selections senna piel AA e D Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation mode Press the F4 Harmonic key to set the operation mode to Harmonic 2 Setting the analysis method Press the F1 Wave key to set the analysis method to Wave 9 4 IM OR100E 01E 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data 3 Setting the frequency Press F1 and F2 keys to set the frequency of the signal under measurement Note Sample rate is fixed according to the frequency 50 Hz 25600 S s 60 Hz 30720 S s 4 Setting memory length Set the memory length in units of cycles with F1 to F4 keys Memory length is the amount of data that is saved in one data capturing operation Pressing Next will show the next set of selections The relationship between the memory length and number of blocks are as follows Memory Length Number of Cycles 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Number of blocks Normal trigger 32 16 8 4 2 1 wt Number of blocks WW trigger 16 8 4 2 1 1 Two channels are linked 2 Four channels are linked OR342 5 Setting the kind of tri
89. queries the vertical scale of the RMS value graph of the automatic analysis MENU HARMonic UNIT LINear LOG MENU HARMonic UNIT MENU HARMONIC UNIT LINEAR MENU HARMONIC UNIT MENU HARMONIC UNIT LINEAR Valid only when display content is RMS value or effective power MENU HARMonic WIRing Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analy sis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the wiring method of the automatic analysis MENU HARMonic WIRing SP2W12 SP2W34 SP3W TP3w MENU HARMonic WIRing MENU HARMONIC WIRING SP2W12 MENU HARMONIC WIRING MENU HARMONIC WIRING SP2W12 MENU LINE lt X gt Function Syntax Example Sets queries the line type used to record the analog ch MENU LINE lt X gt OFF THIN MIDD1le THICk MENU LINE lt X gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CH1 to CH4 MENU LINE1 THIN corresponds to MENU LINE1 MENU LINE1 THIN MENU Group MENU LOAILOB BIT lt X gt Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to display record each bit of the logic channel MENU LOA LOB BIT lt X gt lt Boolean gt MENU LOA LOB BIT lt X gt LOA Logic Ach LOB Logic Bch lt x gt 1 to 4 CH1 to CH4 MENU LOA BIT1 ON MENU LOA BIT1 MENU LOA BIT1 1 corresponds to MENU LOPRint Function Syntax Example Sets queries record position of the logic
90. right and left select keys Press the F2 key to toggle increase and decrease Press the F3 or F4 key to set the time Press the down select key to move the cursor to Execute The information regarding the 128 k of data that includes the measured data captured at a specified time is displayed Press the F1 Yes key to load and display the specified data Sep 01 99 00 24 29 C ox Samed iv 7 M Print cursor scale I calc I gt oa D t i Sep 01 99 00 24 29 Cd x1 5 ms d iv 1 7 41 Select Previous Next gt Select Area Of Load File name MEMDAARS Trigger time 99 89 81 00 24 29 Current Area 1 7 41 he Input Time 99 09 01 0A 24 29 E Load Area 1 7 41 09 01 00 24 29 09 01 0 25 48 Sep 01 99 00 24 29 Kx 5 ms div 1 7 41 Yes When the loaded measurement data are displayed the same operations that you can perform on the displayed data captured in the memory described in chapter 6 can be performed These operations include printing displaying cursors scaling zooming in or out and calculating statistics For the operating procedures see section 6 6 to 6 10 IM OR100E 01E 10 15 eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g 10 7 Loading the Setup Data Setting Screen rm Save Load PC Card 9MByte FILE 1 Mode 2 Funct ion 3 File name Execute Data Panel
91. rubbing alcohol on the backside of the paper Then load the paper with the backside facing down See 2 5 Loading the Chart 2 With the release lever down move the chart paper back and forth by hand to clean the printer head 13 14 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Measurement Input Input type Floating unbalanced input isolated channels Input coupling DC GND A D resolution 12 bit internal processing resolution equivalent to 11 bit Maximum sampling rate 400 Ks s all channels simultaneously 80 kS s for wave window mode Input impedance 1 MQ 1 5 pF At 40 kHz Typical Typical values represent typical or average values It is not strictly guaranteed Scaling function Available Input terminal Safety terminal type for banana plug Maximum input voltage Between input terminal HI and LO Overvoltage category Maximum Input Voltage CAT II environment 500 Vrms CAT III environment 300 Vrms 1 CAT II environment Environment represented by research laboratories and offices Local level equipment transportable equipment Primary side of an equipment having a power cord that connects to the power outlet CAT III environment Power distribution level of a building or a factory Primary power supply system level Primary side of an equipment receiving electricity directly from the distribution board or from the branch section to the power outlet Maximum floating voltage
92. scve nsns sevice eadesediovaerdeeadhuetedeaeee 5 7 5 9 RASC e AEEA 1 8 RMS keeta aeie iii A 6 24 RMSP enera aaa A E AEE 9 7 RS 232 Interface i m e aaa EARANN 11 1 Index 2 IM OR100E 01E S save the results of the analysis seseseseeeseseeeeeeeeee 9 8 saving method and file format o oo ee 10 9 saving results of analysis ccceceeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 9 2 Saving the Measurement Data eeceeeseteeeeeees 10 4 saving the Results of the Analysis cseseeeees 9 17 Scrolling the waveform cccceceseeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 6 13 Setting NULL ossee oneer noiet rtr EE E aN 4 7 setting parameters to analyze Setting the Filterer rener Setting the RS 232 oiei inin Setting the Trigger 6 8 9 12 9 14 switching the time a is n e e 9 13 9 15 Synchronized Operation ecceceeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 12 1 synchronous channels cccsceseeceeeeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeees 5 13 Synchronous trigger oo eee eee eee 5 7 5 9 Synchronous Triggering ceseeeeeeseeceeeeneeeeeeeeeees 1 9 T T axis Zoom factor oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeeeees 6 7 Table late r citi otis aki 9 7 Ei n CAA EE E 9 7 A Erea EI EEE EEEE IAEE T ee 12 8 12 9 temperature input adapter seseseeeeeseeeseetersesrersesreee 2 5 Temperature Measurement s sseeseseereseerreeerereerereereee 2 5 Testing the Keysiiiiasvcccsevcusisecsteveveassecasoviosssceseunees 13 12 Testing the memory Testing the
93. the cursor Use the F2 key to select whether to specify the start point or the end point of the range to be saved S and E toggles each time the F2 key is pressed Use the Scroll Cursor key to set the start and end points 10 8 IM OR100E 01E 10 3 Saving the Measurement Date to the PC Memory Card 3 Selecting the data format Use the F3 key to select whether to save the data in binary format or in ASCII format The selected format is indicated with the mark The format will toggle each time the F3 key is pressed 4 Executing the save Pressing the F3 Execute key saves the measurement data in the specified range File name The file name is as follows Binary format dispxxxx dat where xxxx is a sequence number from 0000 to 9999 ASCII format dispxxxx csv where xxxx is a sequence number from 0000 to 9999 Saving method and file format Save Analysis format Method Binary Format Save B ASCII Format Save A Save All Blocks Memory Mode Waveform data weeKKEEK dat Waveform data REEKEEKK OGY Waveform data blk dat Harmonic Waveform Analysis Waveform data kkkkkkkk dat Analyzed data KEKKEEKE OGY Waveform data RkEKKEKK CSV Waveform data blk dat Harmonic Auto Analysis Waveform data kkkkkkkk dat Analyzed data KEKKEKKK OGY Waveform data RkEKKEKK CSV Waveform data blk
94. the ideal waveform peak for specified analog ch for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt FCOunt lt NRf gt lt X gt 1 to 4 TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt FCOunt lt NRf gt 1 to 255 Example TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FCOUNT TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FCOUNT 1 the wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger PEAK lt NRf gt TRIGger PEAK lt NR gt 100 to 100 Example TRIGGER PEAK 50 TRIGGER PEAK gt TRIGGER PEAK 50 gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 57 TRIGger Group TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt PHASe Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the ideal waveform phase for the wave window trigger TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt PHASe lt NR gt TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt PHASe lt NR gt 180 to 180 TRIGGER CHANNEL lt x gt PHASE 30 TRIGGER CHANNEL lt x gt PHASE TRIGGER PHASE 30 TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt TOLerance Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the width of the wave window trigger TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt TOLerance lt NR gt TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt TOLerance lt NR gt 1 to 50 TRIGGER CHANNEL lt x gt TOLERANCE 50 TRIGGER CHANNEL lt x gt TOLERANCE TRIGGER TOLERANCE 50 TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt TYPE Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the trigger type of the specified analog ch TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt TYPE lt Character data gt TRIGge
95. the screen displaying the results of the analysis records the information to the built in printer For tables Records the results for every harmonic order with digital values For bar graphs Records the screen image equivalent to a hard copy 9 18 IM OR100E 01E 9 9 Other Functions The following operations can be carried out on the measurement data in the same way as in the memory mode even when the operation mode is set to harmonic analysis Displaying Recording captured data Zooming in or out on the waveform Cursor display Statistical calculation Scale display IM OR100E 01E 9 19 sishjeuy d1uOWeH 9 10 Computing Equations for Harmonic Analysis OR300E uses the following computing equations for the various analysis Harmonic Voltage RMS value RMS The harmonic voltage can be expressed with the following equation V V sin ot V sin 2mt 0 V sin 2 t 6 V np S N N 1 0t 0 1 V sin not 0 By taking the FFT 512 of this equation the RMS value Vn of the nth order harmonic voltage is decomposed to its components as follows Vn Vnr Vni Vnr is the real component and Vni is the imaginary component Therefore the RMS value Vn of the nth order harmonic voltage can be found by the following equation Vn Vnr Vni 2 Note Since the computational result is linearly scaled in the harmonic mode the result may become negative depending on the linear scale setting
96. thermocouple OFF When not making measurements The input type for DC and GND is as follows DC Frequency characteristics GND without filter Gain 1MQ 3dB H Oo _ Input circuit Lo Input oo H circuit L Oo O DC 40kHz When TC temperature measurement is selected e When making temperature measurements you will need the temperature input adapter that is sold separately The type of thermocouple that can be used is K e Linear scaling is not possible when TC is selected e The filter NULL and auto range settings of the channel set to TC are void e The input type cannot be changed while data capturing or realtime recording is in progress e When the input type is changed to TC from a different setting or to a different setting from TC the measurement range position and linear scaling settings are not maintained e The GND mark of the channel set to TC is not displayed e Temperature measurement values below 100 C are displayed with an asterisk Trigger levels below 50 C on the trigger screen are also displayed with an asterisk IM OR100E 01E 4 3 Buljeos seul pue sixy owl a 14 obuey jUowsisnsesyy y Buas eS 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range Setting Screen Sep 02 97 21 20 MENSJES CH1 to ocoeseseessseeeihfooosscecescesossceefoodioooosesosossosof seoosssihposso
97. thick line for each channel Setting the logic channel Set whether or not to display record the logic inputs Also set the display positions Set the display record to ON OFF for each bit When a check mark is in the check box it is ON Otherwise it is OFF Select the position of the display record from the following Off Do not display record Both Display Record channel A in the upper section and channel B in the lower section If the display format is 2 zone or 4 zone display record channel A in the upper section of the top zone and channel B in the lower section of the bottom zone Bottom Display Record both channel A and B in the lower section of the bottom zone Equal Display Record each bit in equal intervals If the display format is 2 zone display channel A in the upper zone and channel B in the lower zone If the display format is 4 zone display record each bit of channel A an B in order bit 1 2 3 4 from the top zone IM OR100E 01E 7 3 Setting the Recording Format of the Digital Values Setting Screen MENU eee 7 Mode Realtime Format Azone Same as the analog Length Continu 1 Sametime print Numeric 2 Interval ES Gauge print On Logic 1234 Grid Fine CH A BBG Time print On CH B B CH message Off Pos Off CH print Off 3 Playback 1Idata Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Displays the setting men
98. to 100 1 increment Sample rate 80 kS s 1 ms div 40 kS s 2 ms div 16 kS s 5 ms div 8 kS s 10 ms div Memory length Memory cannot be linked maximum memory length of each channel is 200 div 800 div for OR300E or L1 L2 models of OR100E IM OR100E 01E 14 9 suoneoyioeds z 14 6 Display Screen 5 7 inch LCD Dot 480 x 320 dots Contrast adjustment Available Back lighting FL tube ON OFF manually Display language English Japanese Display format T Y display Overlap analog input waveforms and logic input waveforms Set each bit to ON OFF on logic input waveform X Y display X axis channel 1 Y axis channel 2 to 4 Digital value display Display measurement values as numerical values 14 10 IM OR100E 01E 14 7 Harmonic Analysis OR300E Waveform Analysis Mode Section Description of operation 1 CH of harmonic analysis function added to the operation conforming to the memory mode Target frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Sample rate 25600 S s 50 Hz 30720 S s 60 Hz Memory recording length 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 cycle Analysis Operation After taking the measurement analyze the waveform after specifying the target position using the key operation Analyzed parameters RMS value of harmonics relative harmonic content phase angle for each order of each channel and the total RMS value total harmonic distortion IEC CSA Display Bar graph display all harmonics d
99. waveform MENU LOPRint OFF BOTH LOWer EQUal MENU LOPRint MENU LOPRINT UPPRE MENU LOPRINT MENU LOPRINT UPPER MENU MBLength valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries the memory length MENU MBLength lt NRf gt MENU MBLength When the format is T Y lt NR gt 10 20 50 100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 The unit is div 3200 and 6400 div are available on long memory model only When the format is X Y lt NR gt 800 1600 4000 8000 16000 32000 64000 128000 256000 512000 The unit is data 256000 and 512000 data are available on long memory model only MENU MBLENGTH 20 MENU MBLENGTH MENU MBLENGTH 20 MENU MCLear valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to clear the previous memory at memory start MENU MCLear lt Boolean gt MENU MCLear MENU MCLEAR OFF MENU MCLEAR MENU MCLEAR 0 IM OR100E 01E App 37 gt 3 ke 5 x MENU Group MENU MESSage Function Syntax Example Sets queries contents of the message print MENU MESSage OFF COMMent CHIN o MENU MESSage MENU MESSAGE COMMENT MENU MESSAGE gt MENU MESSAGE COMMENT MENU MINTerval valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory and the recording mode is numeric Function Sets queries the di
100. 0 mV 200 0 mV 0 to 200 0 mVrms 50 mV DIV 500 mV 500 0 mV 0 to 500 0 mVrms 0 1 V DIV 1V 1 000 V 0 to 1 000 Vrms 0 2 V DIV 2V 2 000 V 0 to 2 000 Vrms 0 5 V DIV 5V 5 000 V 0 to 5 000 Vrms 1 V DIV 10V 10 00 V 0 to 10 00 Vrms 2 V DIV 20 V 20 00 V 0 to 20 00 Vrms 5 V DIV 50 V 50 00 V 0 to 50 00 Vrms 10 V DIV 100 V 100 0 V 0 to 100 0 Vrms 20 V DIV 200 V 200 0 V 0 to 200 0 Vrms 50 V DIV 500 V 500 0 V 0 to 500 0 Vrms 100 V DIV 1000 V 500 0 V 0 to 500 0 Vrms The measurement range setting and the actual measurement range when the input type is set to TC are as follows n g 5 ro a gt o fo D o 3 3 mr J D 5 re i aL zn 3 gt x D 5 2 e 5 fo D wn 9 D gt Measurement range Acrual measurement 200 C 50 to 200 C 400 C 50 to 400 C 600 C 50 to 600 C Auto range This is set at the screen that appears when the MONITOR key is pressed Press the F2 key V div is automatically set according to the current input signal Auto range is not possible on channels for which the input is set to TC IM OR100E 01E 4 5 4 4 Setting the Filter NULL Position and Zoom Factor Setting Screen CH1 Operation Keys _ Input Filter 2 5 QU 1V DIV 2 5 004 3 5 004 1V DIV 3 5 0U 4 5 004 1V DIV A 5 004 CH 1 off Filter Nu
101. 0jog D When installing the dedicated NiMH battery follow the procedure below 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Ifyou are using the AC adapter remove the AC adapter power cord from the power outlet 3 Turn the recorder upside down and install the battery in the battery holder on the near side of the bottom section so that the A mark on the NiMH battery is on the top If you were using alkaline batteries remove them first IM OR100E 01E 2 15 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF Recharging the NiMH battery The dedicated NiMH battery sold separately is not recharged at the time of purchase When using the NiMH for the first time fully recharge the battery before use In addition an AC adapter sold separately Model No 788011 is necessary to recharge the battery e Always use the OR100E OR300E to recharge the battery e Recharge the battery in an environment with a temperature between 10 to 35 C Otherwise the battery may leak heat up or not get fully recharged Procedure on Recharging 1 Install the battery as explained previously and connect the AC power supply to the recorder 2 Ifyou leave the power switch to OFF the LED on the side of the AC adapter jack lights and starts recharging the NiMH battery The LED blinks quickly when the recharging is complete If the power switch is ON it will not recharge the NiMH battery In this case the power to the recorder is supplied from
102. 1 20 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 2 Displaying the voltage axis zoom screen Press the channel CH1 to CH4 key to select the channel to zoom on the vertical axis on the playback screen Voltage zoom screen is displayed 3 Setting the zoom factor Set the zoom factor with the F3 up or the F4 down key Select the zoom factor from 1 2 2 3 1 2 or 5 times IM OR100E 01E 6 17 Bundes ea E 6 9 Displaying the Cursor Setting Screen Cursor display screen PLAY BACK Cursor display 2 000 _ 11 975ms ex1 2mszdiv Block 32732 Print J ourgor Jfer Cato Cursor display screen Buus oou O 250 GHz oou off i Me c Les Ie 5 Weone Cursor A Cursor B If only cursor A is displayed displays the time of the cursor A position If both cursor A and B are displayed displays the time difference between A and B and the frequency calculated from the time difference If only cursor A is displayed displays the measured value of the cursor A position If both cursor A and B are displayed displays the difference between A and B Go back to the previous screen Display Clear cursor B Selects cursor to move Operation Keys PRINT COPY BUODE Displays the captured data 6 18 IM OR100E 01E 6 9 Displaying the Cursor Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the cursor
103. 1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt VOLT lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 to 2 lt NR gt Measurement range that can be specified le9tole 9 0 0 le 9to 1le9 When MEASURE is specified current measured value is used CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 VOLT MEASURE CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 VOLT CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 VOLT 1 234 CHANnel lt X gt SCALing UNIT Function Syntax Example Sets queries the scaling unit for the specified channel CHANnel1 lt X gt SCALing UNIT lt character string gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing UNIT CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT OR100E CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT OR100E CHANnel lt X gt TAG Function Syntax Example Sets queries the tag character string for the specified channel CHANnel1 lt X gt TAG lt character string gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt TAG lt character string gt 7 characters or less CHANNEL1 TAG OR100E CHANNEL1 TAG gt CHANNEL1 TAG OR1LOOE App 20 IM OR100E 01E COMMunicate Group CHANnel lt X gt UPPScale Function Sets queries the upper limit scale for temperature measurements Syntax CHANnel lt X gt UPPScale lt NR gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt UPPScale lt NR gt 30 to 600 10 steps Example CHANNEL1 UPPScale 500 CHANNEL1 UPPScale CHANNEL1 UPPScale 500 COMMwUnicate Group The commands in the COMMunicate Group are used to se
104. 10 4 and 10 5 are invalid The measurement data that is saved includes all analog channels that are not turned OFF and logic channels that are being displayed IM OR100E 01E 10 7 C o gt Q m gt x lt gt D 2 o 10 3 Saving the Measurement Date to the PC Memory Card Saving Data from the Screen Displaying the Waveform Waveform data can be saved by specifying a range while viewing the waveform This is possible from the waveform display screen in the Memory mode and the waveform display screen of the OR300E s Harmonic mode Setting Screen PLAY Sep 01 99 00 04 09 Ga BACK ex1 5 ms div 1 7 M Print Cursor Lscale IL calc gt 0 0 C 349 375ms ex1 5 ms div Scale DataSave p S 125 08ms ane atus Save style 225 8 ms eB inary e EE esci Operation Keys Makes a selection F2 FS ra fe Display the next page Ce D v Q m Teri D Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the setting screen At the waveform display screen that is displayed by pressing the Playback key press the Next key and then the F2 Save key In the harmonics mode press the F3 Save key A screen used to set the range of data to be saved and the data format will appear 2 Setting the range of data to be saved using the cursor Set the range of data to be saved using
105. 1E sei 1 3 Operation Mode There are three types of operation modes on the OR100E and four types on the OR300E Memory mode This instrument can save the sampled data in the internal memory acquisition memory This is useful in recording changes that are too fast to be recorded in realtime You can display the captured data in the internal memory and read the measurement value or make statistical calculation on an interval using the cursors You can also zoom in or out on the waveform In addition you can record the captured data Furthermore you can save the captured data to a flash ATA card By changing the time div and data length settings the measurement data can be captured with the optimum conditions Realtime mode The recorder displays the captured data in realtime or records the data with the built in printer In the realtime mode you can record analog waveforms as well as digital values Realtime mode memory mode The recorder captures the measurement data to the memory while it displays and records the captured data in realtime You can use the trigger function to display the waveform in realtime and capture the data to the internal memory when the trigger conditions are met Harmonic mode OR300E only This mode is for analyzing harmonics There are two types of analysis methods Waveform analysis Harmonic analysis is performed over one cycle of acquired data from the point specified by the cursor P
106. 50 V FS 5 V div 50 00 V rms 2 of FS 50 mV 100 V FS 10 V div 100 0 V rms 2 of FS 0 1 V 200 V FS 20 V div 200 0 V rms 2 of FS 0 1 V 500 V FS 50 V div 500 0 V rms 2 of FS 0 1 V 1000 V FS 100 V div 500 V rms 2 of FS 0 1 V Temperature coefficients Zero point 0 04 of FS C Gain 0 02 of FS C Frequency characteristics DC 40 Hz to 1 kHz Response Time against the step input of 0 to 100 Rising from 0 of FS to 90 of FS 200 msec Typical Falling from 100 of FS to 10 of FS 310 msec Typical Typical values represent typical or average values It is not strictly guaranteed Crest Factor 2 Measurement range RMS value within 90 of the f s at CF2 Harmonic Analysis OR300E Anti aliasing filter 5th order LPF fc 7 5 kHz 30 dB oct Influence to the bandwidth under analysis due to the aliasing 40 db or more Amplitude accuracy voltage current Fundamental to the 20th order harmonics 1 5 of rdg 1 5 of FS The 21st to the 40th order harmonics 1 5 of rdg 2 of FS Phase accuracy voltage current phase difference with respect to the fundamental waveform The 2nd to the 10th order harmonics 5 deg Then 11th to the 40th order harmonics 15 deg I at 50 60 Hz fixed mode excluding the current clamp accuracy r3 2 Harmonic amplitude at FS 100 or higher 3 Automatic setting for harmonic mode only IM OR100E 01E 14 3 suoneoyioe
107. 9200 bps 9600 bps 11 10 IM OR100E 01E 11 6 FAX Modem Inserting the FAX modem card While the recorder is turned ON insert the FAX modem card into the PC card slot with the top surface facing up A message PC card detected is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen SZ PC card eject button Removing the FAX modem card Check that the FAX modem card is not being accessed and press the PC card eject button on the side of the PC card slot CAUTION Do not remove the FAX modem card while it is being accessed as this may damage the PC card For general handling precautions refer to the instructions supplied with the FAX modem card IM OR100E 01E 11 11 suolouny uoresiunwwo Buisn 2i 11 7 Setting the FAX Modem Setting Screen SYSTEM m Communication W 4 1 Port Fax Modem card 2 Baud rate 3 4 Tel number1 L W Tel number2 4 Tel line Tone 5 Header TE Init command1 64L Init command2 7 Set m Date amp Time Date 99 9 19 Time 17 34 13 Set m General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc Off Next page Initialize 1200 2400 4800 9688 gt Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 11 12 IM OR100E 01E 11 7 Setting the
108. ANNEL1 PHASE MENU HARMONIC TREND Description Valid only when the trend save is effective CHANNEL1 PHASE 1 Description Valid only when the trend save is effective gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 35 MENU Group MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt 1 POWer lt X2 gt RMS valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to save the RMS value during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt RMS MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt RMS lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 2 MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 RMS ON MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 RMS MENU HARMONIC TREND lt Boolean gt CHANNEL1 RMS 1 Description Valid only when the trend save is effective MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANnel lt X1 gt 1 POWer lt X2 gt TOTal Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to save the overall results during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt TOTal lt Boolean gt MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1 lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt TOTal lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt
109. ATIS CHANne1 lt X gt INTEG1 Queries the INTEG1 value of calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH STATIS CHANne1 lt X gt INTEG2 Queries the INTEG2 value of calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH STATIs CHANne1 lt X gt MAX Queries the maximum value of the calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH and the time the value was measured STATIs CHANne1 lt X gt MIN Queries the minimum value of the calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH and the time the value was measured STATIs CHANne1 lt X gt RMS Queries the RMS value of the calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH STATIs END Sets Queries the data number of the end of the calculation App 46 App 12 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page STATIS EXECute Executes calculation App 46 STATIs HARMonic CHANne1 lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent Queries the relative harmonic content of each harmonic order of each App 46 analog channel from the results of the harmonic analysis STATIs HARMonic CHANne1 lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt PHASe Queries the phase of each harmonic order of each analog channel App 46 from the results of the harmonic analysis STATIs HARMonic CHANne1 lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS Queries the RMS value of each harmonic order of each analog App 46 channel from the results of the harmonic analysis STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD1 Queries t
110. B query sets bit 6 to MSS This causes the MSS to be read After completion of the read out none of the bits in the status byte will be cleared Serial poll Execution of a serial poll changes bit 6 to RQS This causes RQS to be read After completion of the read out only RQS is cleared Using a serial poll it is not possible to read MSS Clearing the Status Byte No method is provided for forcibly clearing all the bits in the status byte Bits which are cleared are shown below When an inquiry is made using the STB query No bit is cleared When a serial poll is performed Only the RQS bit is cleared When the CLS command is received When the CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affects the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding bits in the status byte are cleared except bit 4 MAV since the output queue cannot be emptied by the CLS command However the output queue will also be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator Standard Event Register Overview of the Standard Event Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bit 7 PON Power ON Bit 7 PON Power ON Set to 1 when power is turned ON Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always 0 Bit 5 CME Command Error Set to 1 when the command syntax
111. C for 1 min Between OR100E OR300E and analog input terminal 2 kVAC for 1 min Between input terminals 2 kKVAC for 1 min Insulation resistance Between OR100E OR300E and power line of dedicated AC adapter 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between OR100E OR300E and analog input terminal 100 MQ or more at 500 VDC Between input terminals 100 MQ or more at 500 VDC Permissible signal source resistance 500 Q or less Environment Operating temperature and humidity except wet bulb temperature 29 C or less no condensation NiMH battery excluded Storage temperature and humidity except wet bulb temperature 29 C or less no condensation NiMH battery Alkaline dry cells excluded Operating altitude 2000 m or less Acoustic noise 65 dB or less Positioning horizontal 5 Time accuracy 100 ppm typical Typical values represent typical or average values It is not strictly guaranteed Battery backup Setting values measurement data backup lithium battery for clock Backup lithium battery life About five years at room temperature 14 14 IM OR100E 01E 14 9 General Specifications External dimensions About 256 H x 190 W x 46 D mm Weight OR122 OR322 2 channel model Approx 1 3 kg batteries chart excluded OR142 0R342 4 channel model Approx 1 5 kg batteries chart excluded Accessories Chart paper Roll paper 111 mm x 10 m part No B9988AE 1 roll Measurement lead Model No 366963 1 lead per channe
112. Capture Measured Data When analyzing automatically automatic analysis Menu 1 ode Harmonic 2 Anis Method EMs 3 Frequency 5 HZ 4 Display RMS Graph 5 Target CH CHA 6 Unit Linear 7 Rep Trg stop condition Stop key 8 emory Printout On PC card Off Save results to PC card 1 min 9 10 Start time On a End time On 2 RMS Cont Phase Total Order CH 1 On On Off Off Odd 3 9 11 H cH 2 On On off off Odd 3 9 CH 3 Off Off off Off Odd 3 9 CH 4 Off Off Off Off Odd 3 9 Displays the setting menu Operation Keys Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections lt Moves between setting parameters Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation mode Press the F4 Harmonic key to set the operation mode to Harmonic 2 Setting the analysis method Press the F2 Auto key to set the analysis method to Auto 3 Setting the frequency Press F1 to F3 keys to set the frequency of the signal under measurement If you select F3 Auto the input signal is measured for a certain period then the frequency is estimated in the range from 45 Hz to 65 Hz in 0 1 Hz steps Note If you select Auto the frequency is estimated on the assumption that the measured signal is a sine wave Therefore correct estimation may not always be possi
113. D PANEL DATA1 FILE SAVE Function Queries all the setting values relating to saving Syntax FILE SAVE Example FILE SAVE FILE SAVE CHANNE 12 YES CHANNEL3 YES CHANNEL4 YES COMMENT OR100E ie END 100 OPTTION 0 START 0 11 YES CHANNE FILE SAVE ASCii Function Syntax Example Saves the measured data in ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii lt Character string gt lt Character string gt File name Within 8 Character FILE SAVE ASCII DATA1 FILE SAVE BINary Function Syntax Example Saves the measured data in binary format FILE SAVE BINary lt Character string gt lt Character string gt file name 8 characters or less FILE SAVE BINARY DATA1 App 26 IM OR100E 01E FILE SAVE CHANnel lt X gt Function Sets queries the channel to save FILE SAVE CHANnel lt X gt YES NO FILE SAVE CHANnel lt x gt Example FILE SAVE CHANNEL1 YES FILE SAVE CHANNEL1 FILE SAVE CHANNEL1 YES FILE SAVE COMMent Function Syntax Sets queries the save comments Syntax FILE SAVE coMMent lt Character string gt FILE SAVE COMMent lt Character string gt filename 16 characters or less Example FILE SAVE COMMENT OR100E FILE SAVE COMMENT FILE SAVE COMMENT OR100E FILE SAVE END Function Sets queries the end data number to save Syntax FILE SAVE END lt NRf gt FILE SAVE END lt NR
114. DITION1 ORDER 5 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 ORDER TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 ORDER 5 Valid only when the kind of trigger is Content HARMonic KIND valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analy sis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the kind of trigger for the automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic KIND THDIec THDCsa CONTent TRIGger HARMonic KIND TRIGGER HARMONIC KIND THDIEC TRIGGER HARMONIC KIND TRIGGER HARMONIC KIND THDIEC IM OR100E 01E App 59 gt 3 ke 5 x TRIGger Group TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize CHANnhel valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Sets queries the synchronous trigger channel for the automatic analysis Syntax TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize CHANnel lt NRf gt TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize CHANnel lt NR gt 1 to 4 Example TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize LEVel Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Sets queries the synchronous trigger level for the automatic analysis Syntax TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize LEVel lt NRf gt TRIGger
115. Data Capturing while Describes how to capture the data when a trigger Realtime Recording occurs while recording in realtime with the built in printer 9 Performing Harmonic This function is only available on the OR300E Analysis Describes how to analyze the harmonic components on the power supply 10 Using External Media Describes how to save measurement data and setup data to the flash ATA memory card and how to load them Describes how to save the data to the flash ATA memory card automatically after capturing the data 11 Using Communication Describes how to set the RS 232 and send waveforms Functions and digital values over the FAX modem Describes how to send the data automatically by FAX 12 Miscellaneous Functions Describes how to operate multiple OR Series in synchronization hard copy record list of setting parameters switch display language set tags and comments and so on 13 Troubleshooting Describes probable causes of problems and their Maintenance and Testing corrective measures Describes the various messages that appear on the screen Also describes how to test the recorder 14 Specifications Lists the functional specifications and general specifications of the recorder Appendix Describes the communication commands Index IM OR100E 01E How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 100 k data K Denotes 1024 Example 640 KB file size Used Char
116. EG1 lt X gt 1 to 3 Y1 to Y3 Example STATIS XIs INTEGI 11 230 19 Description gt If calculation is not performed Of f is returned If the result is abnormal is returned STATIS XY lt X gt INTEG2 Function Queries the calculated area during X Y Syntax STATIS XY lt X gt INTEG2 lt X gt 1 to 3 Y1 to Y3 Example STATIS XY1 INTEG2 1 234 Description gt If calculation is not performed Off is returned If the result is abnormal is returned App 48 IM OR100E 01E STATus Group STATus Group The commands in the STATus group deal with the status report For information on the status report see appendix 1 3 oO oe laa Gonsiver 4 Eese lt Space gt lt Register gt A EESR A FiLTer lt x gt lt Space gt ET ey ea ae STATus STATus EESE Function Queries all the settings relating to the status Function Sets Queries the extended event enable of the communication function register Syntax STATus Syntax STATus EESE lt Register gt Example ATUS gt STATUS EESE 0 STATus EESE LTER1 RISE FILTER2 RISE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 LTER3 RISE FILTER4 RISE Example STATUS EESE 0 LTER5 RISE FILTER6 RISE STATUS EESE STATUS EESE 0 LTER7 RISE FILTER8 RISE STATus EESR Function Queries the contents of the extended event LT
117. ER MODE SINGLE Set trigger mode to SINGLE 250 PRINT 1 ACT START1 Start sample 260 PRINT 1 COMMUNICATE WAIT 1 Wait for sample to end 270 280 Get current block number 290 PRINT 1 COMMUNICATE HEADER OFF No header on queries 300 PRINT 1 BLOCK CURRENT Request to output current block number 310 LINE INPUT 1 BLOCKS 320 PRINT 1 COMMUNICATE HEADER ON Set header on queries 330 340 Set block number 350 PRINT 1 DATA BLOCK BLOCKS 360 370 Set send condition for data 380 PRINT 1 DATA FORMAT ASCII Specify ASCII format 390 PRINT 1 DATA START 0 Send start point 0 400 PRINT 1 DATA END 20 Send end point 20 410 PRINT 1 DATA CHAN1 SEND Request to send CH1 data 420 430 LINE INPUT 1 D Read measurement values 440 PRINT D Display the measurement value on the screen 450 PRINT 2 DS 460 CLOSE 470 END gt 3 3 5 2 x IM OR100E 01E App 71 Appendix 1 4 Sample Program Output measured data in WORD format 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 BRR RR RR TR IR TOR TOR TOR TO TOR TOR TOR TOR TOR ACK k k Output measured data in WORD format Communication protocol Data length 8 bits Parity none Stop bit 1 bit BR RK RR IK TK IK TOK TOR TOR TOR TOR TOR TOR TOR TOK IK OPEN COM1 N81NN AS 1 Open RS 232 interface OPEN MEMWORD DAT FOR OUTPUT AS 2 Open file to save measu
118. ERO RISE FILTER10 RISE LTER11 RISE FILTER12 RISE F gt register and clears the register Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR 0 S F E F F F FF F LTER13 RISE FILTER14 RISE FILTER15 RISE FILTER16 RISE QENABLE 1 QMESSAGE 1 STATus CONDition Function Queries the contents of the condition register Syntax STATus CONDition Example STATUS CONDITION 516 gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 49 STATus Group STATus ERRor Function Queries the error code and message head of the error queue Syntax STATus ERRor Example STATUS ERREOR 201 Syntax error Description If there is no error 0 No error is returned You can set whether or not to add the message contents using the STATus QMESsage command STATus FiILTer lt X gt Function _Sets Queries the specified transition filter Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer STATus FILTer lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 Example STATUS FILTER2 RISE STATUS FILTER2 STATUS FILTER2 RISE Description Specify how each bit of the condition register must change to set the event Rise sets the event when 0 changes to 1 STATus QENable Function Sets Queries whether or not to store messages other than error messages in the error queue Syntax STATus QENable lt Boolean gt STATus QENnable Example STAT
119. ESR query is used that register are set to 1 to check whether bits in gt or 0 IM OR100E 01E App 65 xipueddy E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Status Byte Overview of Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESBMAV EES EAV 1 0 MSS Bits 0 1 and 7 Not used always 0 Bit 2 EAV Error Available Set to 1 when the error queue is not empty i e when an error occurs For details refer to page App 58 Bit 3 EES Extended Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the extended event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page App 57 Bit 4 MAV Message Available Set to 1 when the output queue is not empty i e when there is data which is to be output when an inquiry is made Refer to page App 58 Bit 5 ESB Event Summary Bit Set to 1 when a logical AND of the standard event register and the corresponding enable register is 1 i e when an event takes place in the instrument Refer to page App 55 and App 56 Bit 6 RQS Request Status MSS Master Summary Status MSS is set to 1 when a logical AND of the status byte except for bit 6 and the service request enable register is not 0 i e when the instrument is requesting service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when MSS changes from 0 to 1 and is cleared when
120. Gger LOGic FILTer Sets Queries the trigger filter of the logic CH for the normal trigger App 60 TRIGger MODE Sets Queries the trigger mode App 61 TRIGger RWAVe Sets Queries the reference waveform of the wave window trigger App 61 TRIGger STTime Sets Queries start time of the time trigger function App 61 TRIGger SYNChronize Queries all setting values relating to the synchronization trigger of App 61 the wave window trigger TRIGger SYNChronize CHANnel Sets Queries the synchronization trigger channel of the wave App 61 window trigger TRIGger SYNChronize EDGE Sets Queries the synchronization trigger edge of the wave window App 61 trigger TRIGger SYNChronize LEVel Sets Queries the synchronization trigger level of the wave window App 61 trigger TRIGger TIME Sets Queries whether or not to use the time trigger function App 61 Common Command Group CLS Clears the standard and extended event registers and the error queue App 62 ESE Sets Queries the value of the standard App 62 ESR Queries the standard event register value App 62 IDN Queries the recorder mode App 62 OPT Queries installed options App 63 PSC Sets Queries whether or not clear the following registers when the App 63 power is turned ON RST Resets the current setting App 63 SRE Sets Queries the value of the service request enable register App 63 STB Queries the value of the status byte register App 63 TST Executes a self test and queries the resu
121. HANne1 lt X gt SCALing COEFficient lt X gt 1 to 4 Example DATA CHANNEL1 SCALING COEFFICIENT 1 234 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing MODE Queries the ON OFF condition of the scaling of the specified analog channel Syntax DATA CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing MODE lt X gt 1 to 4 Example DATA CHANNEL1 SCALING MODE gt 1 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing OFFSet Function Function Queries the scaling offset value of the specified analog channel Syntax DATA CHANne1l lt X gt SCALing OFFSet lt X gt 1 to 4 Example DATA CHANNEL1 SCALING OFFSET gt 1 234 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing UNIT Function Queries the scaling unit of the specified analog ch Syntax DATA CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing UNIT lt X gt 1 to 4 Example DATA CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT gt mv DATA CHANnel lt X gt SEND Function Sends the data of the specified analog channel Syntax DATA CHANne1l lt X gt SEND lt X gt 1 to 4 Description ASCII Format 2 folet7 fe fefs f po EES CES EEE The measured values are separated by OX2C and output for each data No The unit character string can be queried using DATA CHANnel lt x gt RANGE WORD format The output format is 8 lt 8 digit decimal number gt lt data byte string gt lt CRC gt lt crlf gt 8 Indicates that it is lt block data gt The number indicates the number of digits in the byte number field of the followi
122. Input Method of Numerical Values and EE Characters Setting the numerical value You set the numerical value by increasing or decreasing the current setting value by 1 or 10 10 1 1 10 are assigned to F1 to F4 keys respectively You press the M IM AQ F1 to F4 keys to increase or decrease the setting value Ext trig Off Start time On 2 Interva Off meee e ae Change by 10 Change by 1 Change by 1 Change by 10 IM OR100E 01E 1 13 1 6 Deletes the previous character Back space Input Method of Numerical Values and Characters Character Input When entering characters and symbols letters and symbols are displayed on the lower section of the screen Select the character with the scroll cursor key and move the character position with the select key Ext trig Off Start time On 2 Interva Off 10 1 1 18 Inserts a character before the character input position Switches upper lower case letters Moves the character input position Selects the character highlighted section moves to the right Selects the character highlighted section moves to the left 1 14 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 2 Before Operation 2 1
123. LE 5 0000E 0 VOLT 5 0000E 0 CHANNEL1 SCALING UNIT mV yy CHANnel lt X gt SCALing MODE Function Syntax Example Sets queries the ON OFF condition of the scaling for the specified channel CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing MODE lt Boolean gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing MODE CHANNEL1 SCAILNG MODE OFF CHANNEL1 SCALING MODE CHANNEL1 SCALING MODE 0 CHANnel lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt Function Syntax Example Queries all setting values relating to POS1 and POS2 for the specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 CHANNEL1 SCALE 5 0000E 0 VOLT 5 0000E 0 CHANnel lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt SCALe Function Syntax Example Sets queries the scaling value of POS1 and POS2 for the specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt SCALe lt NR gt CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt SCALe lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 to 2 lt NR gt Measurement range that can be specified le9tole 9 0 1le 9to 1e9 CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 SCALE 1 234 CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 SCALE CHANNEL1 SCALING POS1 SCALE 1 234 CHANnel lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt VOLT Function Syntax Example Sets queries the measured value of scaling POS1 and POS2 for the specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt VOLT MEASure lt NR gt CHANne1 lt X
124. M MTKEY INVALID string data gt SYSTEM MTKEY SYSTEM SYSTem TNUMber MTKEY INVALID Example SYSTEM TNUMBER 0123456789 7 SYSTEM TNUMBER SYSTEM SYSTem RMSStatis TNUMBER 0123456789 Function Sets Queries whether or not to calculate the expansion SYSTem WTWC Syntax SySTem RMSStatis lt Boolean gt Function Sets queries the function used to change the SYSTem RMSStatis width of the wave window trigger Example SYSTEM RMSSTATIS ON Syntax SYSTem WTWC lt Boolean gt SYSTEM RMSSTATIS gt SYSTEM SYSTem WTWC RMSSTATIS 1 Example SYSTEM WIWC ON SYSTEM WTWC SYSTEM WTWC ON SYSTem STTime Function Sets queries the time at which the width of the wave window trigger is changed Syntax SYSTem STTime lt Character string gt SyYSTem STTime Example SYSTEM STTIME 20 00 00 SYSTEM STTIME gt SYSTEM STTIME 06 00 00 SYSTem TAG Function Sets Queries whether or not to use the tag Syntax SYSTem TAG lt Boolean gt SYSTem TAG Example SYSTEM TAG ON SYSTEM TAG SYSTEM TAG 1 SYSTem TLINe Tel Line Function Sets Queries the type of telephone line used for FAX MODEM Syntax SYSTem TLINe PULSe TONE SYSTem TLINe Example SYSTEM TLINE PULSE SYSTEM TLINE SYSTEM TLINE PULSE SYSTem TNUM2 Tel Number Function Sets Queries the destination telephone number 2 for FAX MODEM Syntax SYSTem TNUM2 lt Character
125. M OR100E 01E 8 1 8 2 Setting the Realtime Memory Mode In this chapter only the differences between the Realtime Memory mode and the Memory mode are explained For parameters that are not explained in this chapter see the corresponding sections in chapter 6 on the Memory mode Setting screen mMenu n a __ __ Sample rate calculated Mode Kue 48kS sl from time div 1 Format Azone 2 Chart gt 1asvdiv g Mem Length 1 div ae Measurement time Mag x1 32block 1 Number of blocks Trigger kind Normal calculated from the memory length Memory clear Off Rep Trg stop condition Stop key 3 Memory Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Logic 1234 Length Continue CH A B BBH Gauge print On CH B Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Memory Realtime Rea 1 Men Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 8 2 IM OR100E 01E 8 2 Setting the Realtime Memory Mode Operating Procedure 1 Setting the display recording format Set the display recording format with the F1 to F4 keys 1 zone Display Record every channel in one zone 2 zone Display Record channels 1 and 2 to the upper zone and c
126. MIN Function Queries the minimum value of the calculation result of the specified analog CH and the time the value was measured Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt MIN lt X gt 1 to 4 STATIS CHANNEL1 MIN 3 1 23V 2 3ms Example Description lt minimum value gt lt time of measurement gt If calculation is not performed Off is returned If the result is abnormal is returned STATIs CHANnel lt X gt RMS Function Queries the RMS value of the calculation result of the specified analog ch Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt RMS lt X gt 1 to 4 STATIS CHANNEL1 RMS 3 1 23mvV Example Description If calculation is not performed Of is returned If the result is abnormal is returned IM OR100E 01E App 45 gt 3 ke 5 x STATIs Group STATIs END Function Sets Queries the data number of the end of the calculation Syntax STATIs STARt lt NRf gt STATIs STARt lt NR gt Data No 0 to 127999 128kW CH Model No 0 to 511999 Example STATIS END 1000 STATIS END STATIS END 1000 STATIs EXECute Function Syntax STATIsS EXECute Example STATIS EXECUTE STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent Function Executes calculation Queries the relative harmonic content of each harmonic order of each analog channel from the resu
127. NATION OR DELAY 0 EXTERNAL OFF INTERVAL OFF LOA TYPE AND PATTERN1 DONT PATTERN2 DONT PATTERN3 DONT PATTERN4 DONT TRIGGER LOB TYPE OR PATTERN1 DONT PATTERN2 DONT PATTERN3 DONT PATTERN4 DONT TRIGGER LOGIC FILTER ON FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER TIME 0 TRIGger CHANnel lt X1 gt LEVel lt X2 gt Function Sets Queries the trigger filter levels of the specified analog ch for the normal trigger Syntax TRIGger CHANnel lt X1 gt LEVel lt X2 gt lt NRf gt TRIGger CHANnel lt X1 gt LEVel lt X2 gt lt X1l gt 1 to 4 lt X2 gt 1 to 2 lt NR gt 100 to 100 Example TRIGGER CHANNEL1 LEVEL1 10 TRIGGER CHANNEL1 LEVEL1 TRIGGER CHANNEL TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt LEVEL1 10 Function Queries all setting values relating to the TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt OFFSet Function Sets Queries the ideal waveform offset for specified analog ch for triggering Syntax TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt lt X gt 1 to 4 Example TRIGGER CHANNEL1 TRIGGER CHANNEL1 TYPE WINOUT FILTER ON LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 0 FCOUNT 1 the wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger OFFSet lt NRf gt TRIGger OFFSet lt NR gt 100 to 100 Example TRIGGER OFFSET 100 TRIGGER OFFSET TRIGGER TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt FCOunt OFFSET 100 Pier Count TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt PEAK Function Sets Queries the trigger filter amount of the 2 i Function Sets Queries
128. OR IOOSC ORSOOCE Handy Oscillographic Recorder USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM OR100E 01E 1st Edition Foreword Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No ORO8 1st Edition October 1999 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA OR100E OR300E This User s Manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Display contents illustrated in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited All company and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies st Edition October 1999 All Rights Reserved Cop
129. OR100E 01E Index 1 3 Q D x Index H handshake sz scccscesadessiessacescsnsscivardsfsnssesasbsedenageevvassaova 11 9 Hand shaking niecne n ee a 11 4 Hard Copy harmonic analysis CXCCUUN Greiner R E A PrEQUENCY gni r E O ieee memory length RM Sese aRar A TEERAA EEN RMS P a e Seitas setting parameters ssessseseesisressesesesresreseesesee 9 1 switching the harmonic order 0 0 0 9 14 switching the time axis oe eee 9 15 Tablel as Table ies a E a EEE Ei Vinita Zan ecane i N 12 11 Input Coupling INTEG2 K Kind of analysis 0 ceceecesceseeceeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeneeaeeeeeees 5 13 L LAM SUA SE EET 12 7 levels of the synchronous channels 00 0 0 5 13 ET AE E EE E E E T 6 8 line for recording seeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeestsretsrsrsrsrsrsesrsrses 6 11 linean en de S E r A NENE 9 8 Linear Scaling aorserienenrant auia 4 10 locking th keys icccsciessteccecsviesancecsuavsaatecsorusi 12 14 logies 9 8 logic channel unosi ire EE 6 7 Logi Prob esis czecscszessiscacsassscinczsccseyessasnacsvavesatsciczeseets 2 7 Copic HE SEP eseo aA O AREAREN 1 8 VO BIC TS a E E E A 5 5 LOW en e ESEE EEO ass 1 8 M manual trigger eeseeseeceeeeseeceeeeseeseeeeaceseeeeeeeaeees 5 11 Measurement Range esecessecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 2 4 4 Memory Full vesisescccsecsvsveseescacsssueserssachassessessanaastee Memory length 3 secccccseseacesguscacaunneeasees memory length s
130. OWER gt 3 33var returned Description If calculation is not performed of is If calculation is abnormal is returned returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic EXECute Valid only when the operation mode is setto STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt harmonic ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent Function Executes the harmonic analysis Function Queries the relative power content of each Syntax STATIs HARMonic EXECute harmonic order from the results of the Example STATIS HARMONIC EXECUTE harmonic analysis Description Valid only when the screen is at the Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt harmonic analysis screen ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt a ae A ACTPower for single phase two wire CH3 CH4 lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Function Queries the total effective power from the Harmonic order Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 ORDER3 CONTENT gt 3 33 results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt ACTPower NN Eott ae Description If calculation is not performed of is lt X gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only 5 returned for single phase two wire a oa If calculation is abnormal is CH3 CH4 Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 tet rned ACTPOWER gt 3 33W STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt Description If calculation is not performed of f is ORDer lt X2
131. Off Disable external trigger Rise Triggers on the leading edge Fall Triggers on the trailing edge When using an external trigger input a trigger signal at the trigger in terminal 5 Setting the time trigger Set the start time trigger to ON OFF with the F1 and F2 keys If On is selected select the time to set the trigger with the F1 to F4 keys Cannot be specified when the memory length is set to PC card 6 Setting the interval time trigger Set the time interval with the F1 to F4 keys Select Off 10 min 1 hour or 24 hour intervals Interval time is set only when the AND OR setting see page 5 3 is set to OR Cannot be specified when the memory length is set to PC card IM OR100E 01E 5 5 Bunebbuy peo 5 4 Setting the Wave Window Trigger When Creating the Wave Window with the Ideal Signal Setting Screen Mode Memory Format Azone Length 1Qdiv T scale Mag x1 4 kS s e 16block 1 Trigger kind Window Tri TRIGGER Trigger 2 Mode Syne trigger 6 3 Ref wave CH CH 1 4 Delay i 18 Edge Rise 5 Freq 5 HZ Level 20 r Wavelindow CH Type Condition On Peak 50 Offset 8 5 004 Phase B Tolerance 10 8 i On Peak 50 Offset Bx 5 V Phase B 9 Tolerance 20 E On Peak 50 Offset Bx 5 004 Phase a Tolerance 6 Off Start tim
132. PFACTOR gt 3 33 Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIS HARMonic POWer lt X gt REACtpower Function Queries the reactive power from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt REACtpower lt X gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only for single phase two wire CH3 CH4 Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 REACTPOWER gt 3 33VA Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic STARt Function _Sets queries the first data number of the harmonic analysis 511999 for 128 kW CH model STATIs HARMonic STARt lt NR gt STATIs HARMonic STARt lt NR gt data number 0 to 127999 0 to 511999 for 128 kW CH model STATIS HARMONIC START 0 STATIS HARMONIC START STATIS HARMONIC START 0 Syntax Example Description Valid only when the screen is at the harmonic analysis screen STATIS STARt Function Sets Queries the data number of the start of the calculation Syntax STATIs STARt lt NRf gt STATIS STARt lt NRE gt Data No 0 to 127999 128kW CHModelNo 0 to 511999 Example STATIS START 0 STATIS START STATIS START 0 amn STATIs XY lt X gt INTEG1 Function Queries the calculated area of the X Y recording Syntax STATIS XY lt X gt INT
133. Pressing the F2 Lin Log key at the screen displaying the RMS values switches the horizontal axis I o 3 e gt gt 2 lt Q o When the parameter to be analyzed is Cont P or Phase P Active Power Cont 162 CH3 CH4 Phase 162 CH3 CH4 108 a 18a 186 a 188 184 H18 HIA Harmonic order Harmonic order IM OR100E 01E 9 15 9 6 Analyzing Automatically Changing the analysis condition After capturing the measurement data you can change the analysis condition and the channel to be analyzed before executing the analysis 1 Displaying the menu Press the F1 Back key at the screen immediately after the automatic analysis If you press the F1 Analysis key again a menu for selecting the analysis condition appears ESC Contente CH 3 Gl Execute 2 Setting parameters to analyze Pressing the F2 key displays a menu for selecting the parameters to be analyzed Select the parameter using F1 to F4 keys 3 Setting the channel Pressing the F3 key opens a menu for selecting the channel to analyze Select the channel number using F1 to F4 keys However if you selected RMS P Cont P Phase P and Table2 there is no channel selection 4 Executing Pressing the F4 Execute key starts the harmonic analysis 9 16 IM OR100E 01E 9 7 Saving the Resul
134. RID OFF MENU GRID MENU GRID OFF MENU ACCumulate Valid only when the mode is memory Function _Sets queries the accumulate display Syntax MENU ACCumulate lt Boolean gt MENU HARMonic valid only when the MENU ACCumulate operation mode is set to harmonic Example MENU ACCUMULATE ON Function Queries all the setting values relating to MENU ACCUMULATE gt MENU harmonic mode ACCUMULATE 1 Syntax MENU HARMonic MENU CHARt Example MENU HARMONIC MENU HARMONIC METHOD AUTO DISPLAY PPHASE FREQUENCY 0 050E 03 TREND SAVE STOPKEY CHANNEL1 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 ASE 0 RMS 1 TOTAL 0 MENU RMONIC TREND CHANNEL2 NTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 ASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU RMONIC TREND CHANNELS NTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 ASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU RMONIC TREND CHANNEL4 NTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 ASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU RMONIC TREND POWER1 NTENT 0 ORDER ODDALL ASE 1 RMS 0 TOTAL 1 MENU RMONIC TREND POWER2 NTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU HARMONIC WIRING SP2W12 MENU HARMONIC CHANNEL 1 IM OR100E 01E App 33 Function Sets queries the chart speed when the mode is in realtime memory mode Syntax MENU CHARt lt Character data gt MENU CHARt lt Character data gt SEC2 SEC5 SEC10 SEC30 MIN1 MIN2 MIN5 MIN10 MIN30 HOUR1 Example MENU CHART SEC2 MENU CHART MENU CHART SEC2 MENU CPRint Channel Print Function Sets queries
135. RMS Sets queries whether or not to save the RMS value during trend save App 36 of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd CHANne1l lt X1 gt POWer lt X2 gt TOTal Sets queries whether or not to save the overall results during trend App 36 save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd END Sets queries whether or not to use the end time during trend save of App 36 automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd ENTime Sets queries the end time during trend save of automatic analysis App 36 MENU HARMonic TRENd STARt Sets queries whether or not to use the start time during trend save App 36 of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd STTime Sets queries the start time during trend save of automatic analysis App 36 MENU HARMonic TRENd SAVE Sets queries the trend save interval of automatic analysis App 37 MENU HARMonic UNI Sets queries the vertical scale of the RMS value graph of the App 37 automatic analysis MENU HARMonic WIRing Sets queries the wiring method of the automatic analysis App 37 MENU LINE lt X gt Sets queries the line type used to record the analog CH App 37 MENU LOA LOB BIT lt X gt Sets queries the input of each bit of the logic channel App 37 MENU LOPRint Sets queries record position of the logic waveform App 37 MENU MBLength Sets queries the memory length App 37 MENU MCLear Sets queries whether or not to clear the previous memory at App 37 memory start MENU MESSage Sets queries contents of th
136. Sets queries the Y axis input Y1 to Y3 of the X Y recording MENU XY lt X gt lt Boolean gt MENU XY lt X gt lt X gt 1 to 3 corresponds to Y1 to Y3 MENU XY1 ON MENU XY1 MENU XY1 1 App 40 IM OR100E 01E MONitor Group MONitor Group The commands in the MONitor group are used to set or query parameters corresponding to the MONOTOR key aan ol aan Ee ae LL oe p FORMat lt Space gt ASCii PINTerval lt Space gt lt Time gt J PSENd SEND Ne Pi MONitor MONitor CHANnel lt X gt UNIT Function Queries all setting values relating to the Function Queries the unit of the current measured current measured data output data of the specified analog channel Syntax MONitor Syntax MONitor CHAnnel lt x gt UNIT Example MONITOR MONITOR lt X gt 1 to 4 BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Example MONITOR CHANNEL1 UNIT FORMAT ASCII MV All Caps PINTERVAL 1 000E 00 MONitor FORMat MONitor BYTeorder Function Sets queries format of the data to send Function Sets queries the byte order when sending Syntax MONitor FORMat ASCii WORD data in word format MONitor FORMat Syntax MONitor BYTeorder LSBFirst Example MONITOR FORMAT ASCII MSBFirst MONITOR FORMAT MONITOR MONitor BYTeorder FORMAT ASCII Example MONITOR BYTEORDER MSBFIRST Description WORD data can be converted to physical MONITOR BYTEORDER MONITOR values with th
137. The battery for backing up the setting parameters and measured data is flat Contact you nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 53 Battery flat The battery AAA batteries or rechargeable battery voltage for the power supply is low 2 12 Replace the AAA batteries or recharge the 2 16 rechargeable battery This message is displayed when it detects the low voltage Afterwards a battery warning mark is displayed in the upper left of the screen 54 Data amp Settings initialized Setting parameters have been initialized to the 12 11 default values Communication Syntax Error Messages 100 to 199 Code Message Description Reference Page 102 Syntax error Syntax error other than the ones listed below App 1 to App 57 103 Invalid separator Separate each data with a comma App 1 104 Data type error See pages A 5 to A 7 Use the correct the data App 5 to type App 7 108 Parameters not allowed Check the number of parameters App 5 to App 7 109 Missing parameter Specify the necessary parameter App 5 to App 7 111 Header separator error Separate the header and the data with a space App 2 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the mnemonic character string consisting App 9 to of letters and numbers App 57 113 Undefined header Check the header App 9 to App 57 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header App 9 to App 57 120 Numeric data error Mantissa must be entered before the numeric App 5 value in lt NR3 gt format App 6 123 Exponent too large Use a sm
138. The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The following symbols are used on this instrument A To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the User s Manual or Service Manual _ Function grounding terminal This terminal should not be used as a Protective grounding terminal Direct current ON power O OFF power IM OR100E 01E Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do not Remove any Covers There are some areas with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only IM OR100E 01E 5
139. The recorder does not Check that the thermal paper is installed in the right 2 19 2 20 print direction Waveforms cannot be Check that the input coupling is set to DC 4 3 recorded Check that the trace is turned ON 6 11 The trace intensity is faint When the printing density is high the recorder may lower the intensity to avoid overheating the print head This is normal For all other cases the recorder needs servicing Data cannot be saved to If you are using a new card make sure that it is formatted the flash ATA memory Check that the card is inserted properly card Check that there is enough space available to record 10 2 the data 10 4 Check if the card is supported by the recorder by contacting your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Data cannot be loaded Check that the card is inserted properly 11 11 from the flash ATA Some of the data files saved by other models can not be memory card loaded The recorder cannot be Check that the communication parameters are set correctly 11 8 controlled through the on the computer side and the recorder side RS 232 interface Communication parameters are not changed until after 11 8 highlighting Set and pressing the F1 Confirm key Check that you are using the correct type of cable for the 11 3 intended application Data cannot be sent over Check that the card is inserted properly 11 11 the FAX Check that the settings are correct for the telephone
140. The trigger is set off at point C because the signal stayed above the trigger level for the specified number of three measurement counts point C after point B including point B as one count Trigger detected Measurement ages Trigger source signal Trigger level A Trigger condition Trigger point satisfied Measurement period For T and J of logic trigger trigger does not occur until the trigger conditions are met for the specified number of counts consecutively 1 10 IM OR100E 01E Measurement data Trigger source signal 1 4 Trigger Function Timeout Timeout can be set on normal triggers edge trigger level trigger For edge triggers the trigger is set off if the trigger condition is not detected within the specified number of measurement counts after the first trigger detection For level triggers if a trigger is not detected within the specified measurement count after the first crossing of the trigger level after the detection of the previous trigger a trigger occurs This is useful when observing how the level changes in a periodic signal Below shows an example in which the sampling count is set to 6 and the trigger type is set to level trigger The trigger condition is met at point A and the data crosses the trigger level at point B Since the trigger condition is not met after 6 counts point C from point B the trigger occurs at point C Samplin
141. Tus EESE Reading STATus EESE Condition register Function Current instrument status Writing Reading STATus CONDition Transit filter Function Extended event Writing STATus FILTer lt x gt occurrence conditions Reading STATus FILTer lt x gt Output queue Function Stores response message Writing All executable queues to a queues Reading Error queue Function Stores error Nos Writing Reading STATus ERRor Registers and Queues which Affect the Status Byte Registers which affect each bit of the status byte are shown below Standard event register Output queue Extended event register Error queue Enable Registers Sets bit 5 ESB of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 4 MAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 3 EES of status byte to 1 or 0 Sets bit 2 EAV of status byte to 1 or 0 Registers which mask a bit so that the bit does not affect the status byte even if the bit is set to 1 are shown below Status byte Standard event register Extended event register Masks bits using the service request enable register Masks bits using the standard event enable register Masks bits using the extended event enable register Writing Reading from Registers The ESE command is used to set bits in the standard event enable register to 1 or 0 and the
142. US QENABLE ON STATUS QENABLE STATUS QENABLE 1 STATus QMESsage Function Sets Queries whether or not to add the message contents to the STATus ERRor response Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt STATus QMESsage Example STATUS QMESSAGE OFF STATUS QMESSAGE gt STATUS QMESSAGE 0 STATus SPOLI Serial Poll Function Executes a serial poll Syntax STATus SPOL1 Example STATUS SPOLL gt 4 App 50 IM OR100E 01E SYSTem Group SYSTem Group The commands in the SYSTem group set or query system parameters These commands correspond to the SYSTEM key O 0A lt Space gt E BMPFile CLEVel lt x gt T A HEADer lt Space gt lt Character string J OFF d lt NRf gt lt Space gt lt Character string k LANGuage lt Space gt ENGLish JAPanese X MTKey lt Space gt INValid VALid OA O r lt NRf gt ih STTime lt Space gt lt Character string J lt NRf gt i TLINe lt Space gt PULSe TONE TNUM2 lt Space gt lt Character string TNUMber lt Space gt lt Character string lt Space gt gt 3 3 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 51 SYSTem Group SYSTem Function Queries all the system settings Syntax S
143. VA MAX Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Operating humidity 35 RH to 80 RH Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage humidity 90 RH or less Withstand voltage Between input to output 500 VAC for 1min Insulation resistance Between input to output 100 M ohm 500 VDC Fuse 788025 1 250 V timelag 6 3 A 05x20 788025 2 250 V timelag 4 A 5x20 788025 3 250 V timelag 4A O5x20 Input terminal Feed through terminal External dimensions About 68 W x 26 2 H x 167 D mm cable excluded Weight Approx 400 g cable included Accessory Instruction Manual e Use the input cables provided by YOKOGAWA for the recorder To avoid electric shock never touch the input terminals while the power is ON To avoid electric shock check the following before connecting the input cable Check that the supply voltage matches the input voltage of the recorder Check that the power on the supply side is turned OFF e Check that the OR100E OR300E power switch is turned OFF before connecting the output cable to the OR100E OR300E Do not put objects on top of the recorder or cables or let heat sources come in contact with the recorder or cables e Make sure to cover the terminals with the terminal cover during use e Tighten the terminal screws with a force of 0 8 N m 8 kgf cm Also tighten the screws periodically IM OR100E 01E 2 17 uoneiodo a10jog D 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF Output cable
144. X2 gt 1 2 MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 TOTAL ON MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 TOTAL gt MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL1 TOTAL 1 Description Valid only when the trend save is effective MENU HARMonic TRENd END Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to use the end time during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd END lt Boolean gt MENU HARMonic TRENd END MENU HARMONIC TREND END OFF MENU HARMONIC TREND END MENU HARMONIC TREND END 0 MENU HARMonic TRENd ENTime End Time Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the end time during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd ENTime lt character string gt MENU HARMonic TRENd ENTime lt character string gt HH MM HH hour 00 to 23 MM minute 00 to 59 MENU HARMONIC TREND ENTIME 01 45 MENU HARMONIC TREND ENTIME MENU HARMONIC TREND ENTIME 01 45 gt MENU HARMonic TRENd STARt valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries whether or not to use th
145. YSTem Example SYSTEM SYSTEM CACTION PRINTER CLOCK DATE 97 07 12 TIME 03 50 12 SYSTEM EX RIGGER HEADER OR1OOE LANGUAGE ENGLISH MTKEY VALID RMSSTATIS 0 TAG 0 TLINE TONE TNUMBER 0123456789 b SYSTem CACTion Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the destination of the hard copy SYSTem CACTion PRINter SYSTEM CACTION PRINTER SYSTEM CACTION SYSTEM CACTION PRINTER SYSTem CLEVel lt x gt Function Syntax Example Sets queries the allowed with of the wave window trigger for each channel SYSTem CLEVel lt x gt lt NRf gt SYSTem CLEVel lt x gt I SYSTEM CLEVel1 20 SYSTEM CLEVe11 SYSTEM CLEVel1 20 SYSTem CLOCk Function Syntax Example Sets Queries all the settings relating to date and time SYSTem CLOCk SYSTEM CLOCK SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 97 07 12 TIME 03 52 58 SYSTem CLOCk DATE Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the date SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt character string gt SYSTem CLOCk DATE lt character string gt YY MM DD YY 2 A D 00 to 99 MM Month 01 tol12 DD Day 01 to 31 SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 97 04 01 SYSTEM CLOCK DATE SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 97 04 01 SYSTem CLOCk TIME Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the time SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt character string gt SYSTem CLOCk TIME lt character
146. a and Clear the measured data and the result of the analysis the result of the analysis Go to the next block Same block If the trigger mode is set to single the measurement stops after saving or clearing the measured data and the result of the analysis 5 1 4 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 6 Data Capturing 6 1 Setting Parameters This chapter describes the methods to capture the measurement data into memory and display and record the captured data The relevant parameters are listed below You will set these parameters using the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Conditions on capturing the measurement data Setting parameters Description Select whether to save the measurement data to memory or realtime record with the built in printer Select Memory The number of data points to capture in one data capture Set in terms of div 80 data div except for X Y format in which case set in terms of data points Operation mode Memory length Kind of Trigger Select normal trigger or wave window trigger When using X Y format it is fixed to normal trigger Clear memory at start Select whether or not to clear the measurement data captured previously at the start of the measurement Condition to stop repeat trigger When the trigger mode is repeat select whether to press the STOP key to stop the measurement or stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fi
147. a byte string gt Outputs the data of 4 ch logic 2 ch regardless of the number of channels When analog input is OFF it outputs 0x7f7f Logic data 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Teee PE EEPE Te E aa a E A Indicates the measurment data of each bit Bits 0 to 3 correspond to bit 1 to bit 4 of the logic input B Indicates the ON OFF setting of the display recording of each bit Bits 8 to 11 correspond to bit 1 to bit 4 of the logic input 0 OFF 1 ON MONitor SEND Sends the current measured data MONitor SEND Function Syntax Description ASCII format Measured value unit six characters eight characters alignment right hy todas a fof for fit Analog 4 ch logic 2 ch are output The measured values are separated by 0x2c Off is output as the measured value for a channel whose input is turned OFF WORD format The output format is 3 lt 3 digit decimal number gt lt data byte string gt lt crlf gt B Indicates that it is lt block data gt The number indicates the number of digits in the byte number field of the following data lt 3 digit decimal number gt Indicates the number of bytes of data 012 12 bytes lt data byte string gt Indicates the measured value Outputs the data of 4 ch logic 2 ch regardless of the number of channels When analog input is OFF it outputs 0x7f7f Logic data 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 A Indicates ie measurment data
148. a signal with small distortion for the synchronous trigger source channel The example in the following figure shows the case when the synchronous trigger type is set to Fall Every time the synchronous trigger triggered it starts the observation of the wave window trigger as shown by the letters A B and C in the figure The wave window trigger cannot be detected until the first synchronous trigger occurs IM OR100E 01E 1 9 1 4 Trigger Function Detected Not detected Trigger source signal Trigger level for the synchronous trigger Measured signal of the synchronous a trigger source channel A Measurement start A Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous trigger point trigger point trigger point trigger point Conditions on Trigger Detection Trigger Filter This feature can be used on normal triggers The trigger occurs when the trigger conditions High condition for Rise Low condition for Fall are maintained throughout the specified number of measurement counts The actual trigger point is located the specified count of points after the point at which the trigger condition is first met Below shows an example in which the measurement count is set to 3 and the trigger type is set to Rise or High The trigger condition is met at point A but the trigger is not set off because the signal falls below the trigger level immediately afterwards The trigger condition is met again at point B
149. ach response unit is separated by a semicolon For a description of the format of the response message unit see the next page Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC RANGE 2 000E 00 lt PMT gt SS XN Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT is a terminator used to terminate each response message CR ODH LF OAH will be the terminator Response message unit format The format of a response message unit is shown below lt Response data gt ee header gt H Space lt Response header gt A response header sometimes precedes the response data Response data is separated from the header by a space For details see App 3 lt Response data gt Response data contains the contents of the response If there are multiple data they are separated by a comma For details see page App 5 Example 2 000E 00 lt PMT gt Data CHANNEL SCALing MODE OFF Ke ees vO Header Data If a program message contains multiple queries the responses are made in the same order as the queries Most queries return only one response message unit but there are exceptions This means that the n th response unit does not necessary correspond to the n th query To be certain that the response message unit corresponds to the correct program message unit place one query in a program message lt Notes when transmitting messages gt e You can send the next message at any time if the previously sent
150. acters Alphanumerics enclosed in double quotation marks usually refer to characters and set values that appear on the screen and panel Note The following symbol marks are used to attract the operator s attention j Affixed to the instrument indicating that for safety the operator should refer to the User s Manual WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the instrument Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument IM OR100E 01E 7 Contents FOPOWOMG aneii inthe teaches A A A E aa E E Eaa 1 Checking the Contents of the Package essesesseeeseeeeeesiresinesirnerirnsrrrsrrrssrrrserrnserne 2 Safety Pre aO S a ar a a a a aa AE ks e a a te ea ees eee 4 How t Use This Manual ss sioitsii hee cecstetedecsasncnadsdecduatensestestessieregaesiecatiansacesdiines 6 Chapter 1 Overview 1 1 Names of the Parts and Their Functions 0 0 ccccccessesseeeeseeeeeeeseeecseeeeseeseeeseeeeneeaee 12 System Confistirati on secs obeeccdsceisveosdeheve chaise escesuielin Na ie 1 3 Operation Modes sirsie itinn eerie hen daN a e A 14 Trigger Funcuion sessiossa aehd dialaadennanniuin athens 1 5 Harmonic Analysis Function 00 eccecescesceeeseeecseeseeecseesesesecseeseeecseeaeeesseeesseseeeeaees 1 6 Input Method of Numerical Valu
151. al Values on how to set these parameters 1 Setting the destination Press the F1 Print key in the playback screen A screen for setting the record range appears Pressing the NEXT key displays the screen for setting the destination Press the F3 Destination key and select FAX The destination is marked with a Press the F4 Execute key to start sending the FAX Note If the destination was set to FAX beforehand you can simply press the PRINT panel key to send the FAX The recording format is the same as the recording format used to record with the built in printer If a connection cannot be established such as when the FAX at telephone number 1 is busy the following procedures are taken When telephone number 2 is not specified The OR redials after approximately 90 seconds If a connection cannot be established after 9 redial attempts FAX transmission is canceled and the measurement data are printed using the built in printer When telephone number 2 is specified The OR immediately dials the second telephone number If a connection cannot be established to telephone number 2 the OR redials the first number after approximately 90 seconds If a connection cannot be established after 9 redial attempts FAX transmission is canceled and the measurement data are printed using the built in printer If the destination is busy it will redial after about 90 seconds If it is sti
152. al trigger key f Valid Ext term start stap Key lock Off Display arid On Wh tra level change Off Start time gt AB End time amp B Change level CH1 B CH2 CH3 B CHA Bs ESC Self test Go back to the previous screen Leyal 2 H Ualid Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection ra _ for Displays the next set of selections t Moves between setting parameters Sets off the trigger 5 10 IM OR100E 01E 5 5 Triggering with the Manual Trigger Key Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the setup screen At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next page and press the F1 OK key A screen for enabling disabling the manual trigger is displayed 2 Enabling the manual trigger Set the manual trigger key to Enable with the F2 Enable key With the above operation the manual trigger is enabled Pressing the Manual Trigger key during trigger wait condition sets off the trigger Manual Trigger key is not valid when the trigger mode is free or when the measurement is stopped You cannot use the manual trigger while using the harmonic trigger 5 11 IM OR100E 01E Bunebbuy a 5 6 Setting Trigger for Automatic Analysis of Harmonics Setting screen Menu Mode gt Harmonic Anis Method Site Frequ
153. aller exponent in lt NR3 gt format App 5 to App 57 124 Too many digits Limit the number of digits to 255 or less App 5 App 57 128 Numeric data not allowed Use a format other than lt NRf gt format App 5 App 57 IM OR100E 01E 13 7 Hunooys jqnolL Buns pue ssueuazueN 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Code Message Description Reference Page 131 Invalid suffix Check the units for lt Voltage gt lt Time gt and App 6 lt Frequency gt 134 Suffix too long Check the units for lt Voltage gt lt Time gt and App 6 lt Frequency gt 138 Suffix not allowed Units are not allowed other than for lt Voltage gt App 6 lt Time gt and lt Frequency gt 141 Invalid character data Enter one of the character strings in I I App 9 to App 57 144 Character data too long Check the character strings in I 1 App 9 to App 57 148 Character data not allowed Enter in a format other than the one in I App 9 to App 57 150 String data error lt Character string gt must be enclosed by double App 6 quotation marks or single quotation marks 151 Invalid string data lt Character string gt is too long or contains App 9 to characters that cannot be used App 57 158 String data not allowed Enter in a data format other than App 9 to lt character string gt App 57 161 Invalid block data Cannot use lt Block data gt App 6 to App 57 168 Block data not allowed
154. analysis are cleared Select the same block and perform the analysis again Specifying the start of the range to analyze Using the cursor specify the first data of the range in which to perform the harmonic analysis Press the F1 Analysis key on the display screen A cursor appear Set the first data of the range in which to perform the harmonic analysis using the SCROLL CURSOR key Note Harmonic analysis is performed over one cycle of measurement data from the specified data 9 10 IM OR100E 01E 9 5 Analyzing by Specifying the Range Setting parameters to analyze and the channels 1 Displaying the menu Pressing the F1 Analysis key at the screen displaying the captured data displays a menu for selecting the analysis condition ESC Contente CH 2 Y Exeoute Go back to the Display parameters to analyze previous screen 2 Setting parameters to analyze Pressing the F2 key displays a menu for selecting the parameters to be analyzed Select the parameter using F1 to F4 keys Table Displays the RMS value relative harmonic content and phase angle for each harmonic order of the specified channel on the graph and displays the harmonic distortion IEC CSA and total RMS value with digital values RMS Displays the RMS value of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion IEC CSA and total RMS value with digital values
155. arameters that are analyzed are RMS values relative harmonic content and phase It also displays harmonic distortion IEC CSA and total RMS with digital values Automatic analysis Upon acquiring one cycle of measured data analysis is performed and the result is displayed Parameters that are analyzed are RMS values relative harmonic content phase effective power relative power content and power phase It also displays active power reactive power apparent power and power factor with digital values IM OR100E 01E 1 4 Trigger Function The following diagram shows the overview of the triggers of this recorder Trigger for the analog channels cH1 Rise fall bi slope level high low window in window out Trigger filter CH4 Trigger filter timeout trigger Normal AND Logic trigger Trigger CEE a CHA Rise fall level high 7 low don t care 4 Logic trigger filter CHB lt External Common filter for all lt lt Time to bits Select one of the triggers beforehand Wave i lt CH1 aeit to Trigger for the analog channels rigger Specify wave window width lt CH4 Time trigger valid only during OR mode Wave window trigger valid only during memory mode Trigger filter valid during memory mode Manual trigger lt amp Condition 1 Set up to 4 types of harmonic distortion levels or relative
156. ase OFF MENU HARMonic DISPlay Example MENU HARMONIC DISPLAY RMS MENU HARMONIC DISPLAY gt MENU HARMONIC DISPLAY RMS MENU HARMonic FREQuency valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic Function Sets queries the frequency of the harmonic mode Syntax MENU HARMonic FREQuency lt Frequency gt AUTO MENU HARMonic FREQuency AUTO Valid only when the analysis lt Frequency gt 50 60 method is set to automatic analysis MENU HARMONIC FREQUENCY 50 MENU HARMONIC FREQUENCY MENU HARMONIC FREQUENCY 0 050E 03 Example MENU HARMonic METHod Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic Function Sets queries the analysis method of the harmonic mode Syntax MENU HARMonic METHod WAVE AUTO MENU HARMonic METHod Example MENU HARMONIC METHOD WAVE MENU HARMONIC MEHTOD MENU HARMONIC METHOD WAVE MENU HARMonic TRENQ valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Queries all the setting values relating to the trend save of the automatic analysis Syntax MENU HARMonic TRENd Example MENU HARMONIC TREND MENU HARMONIC TREND SAVE MIN1 END 1 ENTIME 23 49 START 1 STTIME 18 50 CHANNEL1 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODDALL PHASE 0 RMS 1 TOTAL 0 MENU HARMONIC TREND CHANNEL2 CONTENT 0 ORDER ODD3TO9 PHASE 0 RMS 0 TOTAL 0 MENU
157. ble Sample rate is set according to the frequency as follows 50 Hz 25600 S s 60 Hz 30720 S s Auto Set so that it becomes 512 data cycle 9 6 IM OR100E 01E 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data 4 Display contents Select which results of the analysis to display after capturing the data Use F1 to F4 keys to make the selection RMS Displays the RMS value of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion and total RMS value with digital values Content Displays the relative harmonic content of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion and total RMS value with digital values Phase Displays the phase angle of the specified channel on the bar graph and displays the harmonic distortion and total RMS value with digital values Tablel Displays the RMS value relative harmonic content and phase angle for each harmonic order of the specified channel on the graph and displays the harmonic distortion and total RMS value with digital values RMS P Displays the active power of the specified measurement data on the bar graph and displays the active power reactive power apparent power and power factor with digital values Cont P Displays the relative power content of the specified measurement data on the bar graph and displays the active power reactive power apparent power and power factor with digital values Phase P Displays the
158. ble oo cies eseseeseeecseeseeeeseeetseeseseesceseaeeas 11 2 1133 VHandshakins een onana naa REER AAA rea R E henner 11 4 Matching the Data Format 115 Setin the RS 232 Se oaee a a e ie ie ate EA SaO ENO lE ni AEAEE ET AT EA AET 11 7 Setting the FAX Modem wo cccsecseeeeseseeeeeseeeeseeecseeseeesseseesesseserseesseeseeeeaes 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem a 11 9 Other Fax Modem Functions s src aaas Chapter 12 Miscellanananeous Functions 12 1 Running Multiple OR Series in Synchronized Operation 0 0 00 cceeeeseeeeeereeeeeees 12 1 12 2 Taking a Hard Copy 12 3 Capturing Data using the External Sampling Clock 0 0 0 eseeeeeeseteeseeeeneees 12 6 12 4 Changing the Language of the Display 00 0 cece eeseceeeeseeeeseeaeeeeseeetseeeeseeaees 12 7 12 5 Setting Tags cicada E E OE Meant esha E ates nea Es 12 8 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments rirdi a aE A RES 12 9 12 7 Printing the List of Setting s s savsaciedanenetiedacenenwa nani 12 10 12 3 Winitiala zing 2 srs Satie cesatiascca he ee este hh ia a tes ee ea 12 11 12 9 Starting Stopping Measurement with External Signal 0 ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 12 12 10 Locking the Keyser a can Athenee taal diane AS an ile 12 14 12 11 Turning ON OFF the Grid oo eeseeceesseeeeseeecsecseeeeseeassecseeeseeacseeseeesseeaseeens 12 16 12 12 Temporarily Changing the Width of the Wave Window Trigger 0 0 0 cee 12 18 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Testin
159. bout 35K bytes for the above case Memory length 10 div 800 data points Number of analog channels 4 channels Number of logic channels 2 channels A B Number of logic bits 8 bits 4 bits from A and B File size is about 54K bytes for the above case 10 6 IM OR100E 01E 10 3 Saving the Measurement Date to the PC Memory Card Saving the measurement data automatically You can automatically have the data saved to the flash ATA card after capturing the data in the Memory Realtime Memory or Harmonic mode Set Data save at the PC card parameter under Memory in the setting screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Memory clear Off Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card Set to data save Filename The filenames automatically become AUTO DAT The part indicated with skk is automatically numbered from 0000 to 9999 The number after 9999 is 0000 If the File No is selected at the Initialize parameter at the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed the filename is reset to 0000 Note If the same file name already exists these will overwiritten If the flash ATA card runs out of memory the recorder displays a message and aborts the save Data capturing continues as before When saving the measurement data automatically settings made on pages
160. cations of the recorder Connector and Signal Names 1 23 4 5 67 89 DELC J9PAF 13L6 or equivalent RD Received Data SD Send Data SG Signal Ground RS Request to Send CS Clear to Send Data received from the personal computer Signal direction Input Data transmitted to a personal computer Signal direction Output Ground for signals Signal used for handshaking when receiving data from a personal computer Signal direction Output Signal used for handshaking when transmitting data to a personal computer Signal direction Input Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are not used 11 2 IM OR100E 01E Signal Direction 11 2 Connecting the RS 232 Interface Cable The figure below shows the directions of the signals used by the RS 232 interface of the OR100E OR300E RS Request to send lear t d Computer CS Clear to send SD Send data RD Receive data 7 OR100E 3 2 Table of RS 232 C Standard Signal and their JIS and CCITT abbreviations Signal Table Pin No 9 pin c Abbreviation onnector RS 232 CCITT Description 5 AB GND 102 Signal ground BA TXD 103 Transmitted data BB RXD 104 Received data CA RTS 105 Request to send CB CTS Connection Example of Signal Lines Pin numbers are that of 9 pin connectors In general use a cross cable e OFF OFF XON XON
161. cepted until you enter the password The default is set to 0 password not used If you do a complete initialization the password is also initialized See 12 8 Initializing on complete initialization 11 18 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 12 Miscellanananeous Functions 12 1 Running Multiple OR Series in Synchronized Operation Overview This chapter describes the methods to synchronously operate multiple OR Series Recorders OR100E OR300E ORP PRM OR1400 by utilizing the external trigger function Types of synchronous operation There are two types of synchronous operation A Synchronous operation with OR Series external trigger output as the source B Synchronous operation with external trigger output other than OR Series as the source Trigger In Trigger Out pre bale OR Series Instrument OR Series providing Trigger In external Trigger In a OR Series trigger OR Series signal Trigger In i pea OR Series i Trigger In Trigger In pongge OR Series 39 OR Series A type B type Maximum number of recorders operating synchronously A type Four recorders including the one providing the external trigger B type Supports as many recorders as the output impedance of the external trigger source will allow Signal and operation TRIG OUT Leading edge of a TTL level signal pulse width approx 2 ms TRIG IN Leading edge or trailing edge of a TTL level signal pulse width 2 us or more Input Circ
162. ch program unit is separated by a semicolon For a description of the format of the program message unit see the explanation given in the next section Example CHANNEL1 INPUT DC RANGE 100MV lt PMT gt aa Unit Unit lt PMT gt PMT is a terminator used to terminate each program message For the OR100E CR ODH LF OAH will be the terminator Program message unit format The format of a program message unit is shown below lt Program data gt lt Program header gt 7 Space lt Program header gt The program header contains the command type For details see page App 3 lt Program data gt If there are certain conditions for executing a command they are placed in the program data The program data follows the program header and is separated from the program header by a space ASCII code 20H If there are multiple data they 6699 are separated by a comma For details see page App S Example MENU MODE MEMORY lt PMT gt l Unit Data Response Messages Response messages are returned by the recorder to the controller The format of a response message is shown below As lt Response message unit gt Js lt RMT gt IM OR100E 01E App 1 xipueddy E Messages lt Response message unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response E
163. channel A in the upper zone and channel B in the lower zone If the display format is 4 zone display record each bit of channel A an B in order bit 1 2 3 4 from the top zone Note When recording the captured data you can continue to set the recording format on this setting screen For details see 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data IM OR100E 01E Bunnydes eead 6 4 Setting the X Y Display Format Setting screen MENU AA Sample rate calculated Meny __ from time div Mode Format Length Eip Measurement time 2 Style 32block Number of blocks calculated from the memory length Memory clear ioff Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Gauge print On Grid Fine Time print On CH message Comment CH print On 3 4 Y1 CH2 On Y2 CH3 Off Y3 CH4 Off Memory Realtime Rea 1 Men Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection ea Fa rs ee fem Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters Operating Procedure 1 Setting the display format Set the display format to XY with the F4 XY key 2 Setting the style Select the display style from the following Line Display by connecting the measurement points with a
164. ct sunlight inside a hot vehicle or near fire It may cause leakage or lower the performance and life of the battery e Do not disassemble or modify the battery It will damage the protective device inside the battery and may cause heat and explosion Do not short the battery The heat generated by the batteries may cause burns e Do not throw the battery into fire The battery may explode or the electrolyte solution may spray out This is very dangerous Do not apply excessive shock such as throwing the battery The battery may leak heat up or explode If you are moving the battery by itself do not carry metal objects such as paper clips together with the battery You may short the battery 2 14 IM OR100E 01E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF CAUTION e Do not let water come in contact with the battery It will cause heat and corrosion It will also cause the battery to lose its function e It is not possible to recharge NiMH batteries once they have been over discharged To prevent the battery from getting over discharged when not using it for a long period first recharge the battery then remove it and store it in the following environment Storage for less than 1 year Between 20 C and 35 C at low humidity Storage for less than 3 months Between 20 C and 45 C at low humidity Even if stored in above environment it is recommended to periodically recharge the battery uoneiodo a1
165. ctor 200 us div 1 1000 1 500 1 250 1 100 1 50 1 25 1 10 1 5 1 2 2 500 us div 1 1000 1 400 1 200 1 100 1 40 1 20 1 10 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 ms div 1 1000 1 500 1 200 1 100 1 50 1 20 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 2 ms div 1 1000 1 500 1 250 1 100 1 50 1 25 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 5 ms div 1 1000 1 400 1 200 1 100 1 40 1 20 1 10 1 4 1 2 1 2 10 ms div 1 1000 1 500 1 200 1 100 1 50 1 20 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 20 ms div 1 1000 1 500 1 250 1 100 1 50 1 25 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 50 ms div 1 1200 1 600 1 200 1 100 1 40 1 20 1 10 1 4 1 2 1 2 100 ms div 1 1200 1 600 1 300 1 100 1 50 1 20 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 200 ms div 1 1500 1 600 1 300 1 150 1 50 1 25 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 500 ms div 1 1200 1 600 1 240 1 120 1 60 1 20 1 10 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 300 1 120 1 60 1 30 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 1 300 1 150 1 60 1 30 1 15 1 5 1 2 1 2 1 360 1 120 1 60 1 24 1 12 1 6 1 2 1 2 1 360 1 180 1 60 1 30 1 12 1 6 1 3 1 2 1 s div 1 1800 1 600 2 s div 1 1800 1 900 5 s div 1 1440 1 720 10 s div 1 1800 1 720 30 s div 1 1200 1 600 1 240 1 120 1 60 1 20 1 10 1 4 1 2 1 2 1 min div 1 1200 1 600 1 300 1 120 1 60 1 30 1 10 1 5 1 2 1 2 2 min div 1 1500 1 600 External 1 1000 1 500 samping clock 1 300 1 150 1 60 1 30 1 15 1 5 1 2 1 2 1 200 1 100 1 50
166. d 0 cc eeeeeseeeeeereeeeee 13 14 COMMENTS 525 aE AEE ETETETT 12 9 Communication Function eects 1 4 Communication Speed ceseceeseeseeeeteeeeeeeeeees 11 10 computing Equations for Harmonic Analysis 9 20 connect the input signal cable 0 ee 9 3 Connecting Logic Input Signals ee eeeeeeeeeees 2 7 Connecting the Input Signal ee eeeeeeseereeeeeeeees 2 4 Cont P reesei reis 9 7 CONTENT siene orare Erara REKE ESE 9 7 Cursor D data length ieena a e A 11 9 Date sand Time sirana aain 2 23 Deleting Flest yen E R 10 18 Digital Values i isccccsciviccccccesunenaaeravousnisseen 6 14 7 5 display contents nseni 9 2 display format isisa aS Display Screen ennienni iiare Displaying Captured Data sseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeee Displaying the Loaded Measurement Data Displaying the Waveform seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesreesreees E executing the harmonic analysis c ecseseeeeees 9 12 Expansion Cale veciidiisccesdetauseecenciasieeaveiedess 6 21 6 24 Ext term START STOP npinins 6 21 External Input Output 0 0 eee eee 1 5 External Sampling Clock 12 6 external tipten evsti rd kaise deeds 5 5 F Foal inonesninnessiiingeiasasi iiinis 1 8 FAX Modesa nionane n a 11 10 NIASSA A T EET 10 6 filename se eee ed 10 5 10 13 10 17 5 3 5 5 EEEE ETE N 10 1 PE QUENCY oioi iia 5 7 5 9 9 5 G patge TECOL ie n N era Ea 6 11 7 3 1a o 0 PAEROA 6 11 7 3 12 17 IM
167. d to notify you that it is time to replace the chart When cutting the chart paper pull up slowly on the section of the chart to cut Do not tear the record chart at the thermal head section as paper dust will enter the printer section and cause blurs in printing When using the small carrying case make sure that the chart paper is showing on the outside of the case Otherwise the chart may not feed properly 2 20 IM OR100E 01E 2 5 Loading the Chart pw Before Operation Approx 10 mm Chart holder Chart holder rinter cover Chart guide FEED key Roll chart h 2 21 IM OR100E 01E 2 5 Loading the Chart Precautions on Handling the Charts Storing Chart Paper The thermal paper changes color at about 70 C Since it is affected by heat humidity light and chemicals regardless of whether or not the paper has been used beware of the following points Store the chart in a cool dry dark place After breaking the seal use the chart paper quickly Prolonged contact with plastic films which contain plasticizer vinyl chloride film cellophane tape and so on can cause fading Therefore if the paper is to be stored in a folder use a polypropylene type folder Do not use glue which contain organic solvents such as alcohol and ether on the chart paper as this will cause discoloration For long term storage taking photocopies of the charts is recommended Thermal paper has a te
168. data buffer becomes 1 4th filled Set CA RTS to False when receive data buffer is 3 4th filled Set to True when receive data buffer becomes 1 4th filled No hand shaking XON XON XON XON XON RS XON RTS CS RS CTS RTS OFF OFF Send data control There is no handshaking between the recorder and the computer The X OFF and X ON signals are treated as data and CS is ignored Receive data control There is no handshaking between the recorder and the computer When the receive buffer becomes full all extra data are discarded RS is fixed to True 11 4 IM OR100E 01E XON XON XON RS CS RS 11 3 Handshaking Send data control Software handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When X OFF code is received while sending data to the computer the recorder stops the data sending When it receives the next X ON code it resumes the data sending CS signal from the computer is ignored Receive data control Software handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When the free area of the receive buffer reaches 64 bytes the recorder sends an X OFF code When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sends an X ON code RS is fixed to True Send data control Software handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When X OFF code is received while sending data to the compu
169. data that have been analyzed Perform harmonic analysis first 669 No previous load data No data to be displayed 670 No next load data No data to be displayed 700 Execution error Cannot execute the specified operation 13 4 IM OR100E 01E 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Error Code Error Message Description and Corrective Measures Reference Page 702 No such channel The specified channel does not exist 703 No captured data Cannot execute the specified operation because there is no captured data 704 Invalid data number In the save option of the captured data the specified range for saving the data is incorrect 10 5 705 Channel is off Cannot execute because the input of the specified channel is turned OFF Set the input to DC or change the channel number 4 3 710 Invalid model Cannot load the specified file because the file was saved on different equipment 711 Invalid version Cannot load the specified file because the file was saved on equipment with a different version or a different configuration 712 No data on X axis Cannot execute because the input of the channel set to the X axis is turned OFF Change to another channel 6 6 7 6 713 Remote Push NEXT to local You can release the remote operation carrying out the followings Return to local operation with the communication command Pus
170. der active current Phase difference of the nth order current with respect to the nth order voltage n gt 0 When the current phase is ahead of the voltage phase n lt 0 When the current phase is behind the voltage phase Single phase three wire system three phase three wire system Wn W W n 1 2 3 n 1 n W nth order active power W nth order active power from CH1 and CH2 W z nth order active power from CH3 and CH4 Relative Harmonic Content of Active Power Taking the relative harmonic content of active power of the fundamental component to be 100 the relative active power content for each order is computed nth order relative active power content active power of the nth order active power of fundamental component x 100 Phase Angle Power Measurement Computes the phase difference of the nth order harmonic current with respect to the nth order harmonic voltage cos nth order active power RMS voltage value of the nth order x RMS current value of the nth order gt 0 When the current phase is ahead of the voltage phase lt 0 When the current phase is behind the voltage phase Harmonic Distortion IEC Computes the ratio of the total RMS value of the 2nd to the 40th order harmonics with respect to the fundamental Harmonic Distortion IEC 40 2 RMS value of the nth order harmonic voltage or current RMS value of the fundamental voltage or current IM OR100E 01E 9 21 sish
171. ds z 14 1 Measurement Input Temperature Measurement When using the temperature input adapter 788041 1 Measurement range and accuracy As shown below 23 5 C after a 30 minute warm up and zero calibration sensor accuracy excluded Measurement range Actual Measurement Range Accuracy 200 C 50 C to 200 C FISC 400 C 50 C to 400 C 3 C 600 C 50 C to 600 C 5 C Input type Unbalanced input Linear type Linear approximation using analog circuits Thermocouple type Type K Input terminal Clamp terminal Measuring temperature range 50 C to 600 C Linear output voltage 5 mv C Maximum input voltage 42 V DC AC peak Maximum common mode voltage 42 V DC AC peak Environment in which the temperature measurement adapter 788041 is to be used Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C Operating humidity 35 to 80 Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C Storage humidity 90 or less Response characteristics Rising and falling Within 2 s sensor response excluded Power consumption of the temperature measurement adapter 788041 Power supply Supplied by the OR100E 300E Power consumption 100 mQ or less 14 4 IM OR100E 01E 14 2 Memory Function Time axis 200 500 u s div 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 ms div 1 2 5 10 30 s div 1 2 min div Time axis resolution 80 point div Measurement period 1 80 of the time axis Memory length OR100 standard 10
172. dure The following figure shows the flow of a standard OR100E OR300E operation and the corresponding keys to display the setting screen Operation Keys to display the setting screen Set measurement conditions CH1 to CH4 Measurement range DC V div TC 200 C 400 C 600 C Time div Set the trigger TRIGGER Realtime mode Harmonic mode Realtime memory mode Set the operation mode and MENU the conditions for capturing data aea q MENU Set the display format Set the display format MENU MENU Set the recording format Start measurement START START Start measurement Stop measurement STOP T EBREHE fi Mi STOP p measurement Display captured data PEAK Select the block D o DAEK Display captured data Set the recording format MENU gt aera S a Csunresordngcapunedaa Buty BACK Start recording captured data Start recording captured data BACK Only in Realtime Memory mode Waveform analysis Automatic analysis Start measurement MENU Set the display format START p Ba El A START Start measurement Display the result of analysis STOP Stop measurement Stop measurement STOP I PLAY BACK Display captured data Waveform analysis IM OR100E 01E 3 1 a S a pad 3 D Cc o D 2 7 3 2 Setting of format This chapter describes how to change the functions that are frequently used Th
173. dure is the same as the statistic calculation There are two calculation methods INTEG1 The area of the enclosed area made by the line connecting the start and end points and the waveform INTEG2 The area of the enclosed area made by the vertical lines from the start and end points to the X axis the X axis and the waveform INTEG1 For multiple loo For open curve P P Area S So yy Area S nxSo Area enclosed by curve with start point and end point connected by straight line N No of loops CZ Start point end point Waveform V fy End point For figure 8 loop For spiral loop Rea EREE So0 1 As the number of loops increases the number of overlapping areas also changes End point 6 22 IM OR100E 01E 6 10 Calculating Statistics INTEG2 When there is only one Y data point for each X data point K 3 X area Y 0 Start point End point So Area S So S Area S So i 7 Start point End point X area Y 0 e 4 X area Y 0 End point we point So gt S So Area S So f Y So End point Start point X area Y 0 For waveform with negative minus amplitude Start point Dr X area Y 0 LS Area S S0 S1 End point When there are several Y data points for each X data point Start point Area s s Start point So End point AreaS So 2xSi S2 End point X area Y 0 X area Y 0 IM OR100E 01E 6 23 Bunnydes eead E 6 11 Turning Expansion Calculatio
174. e F4 MIN MAX key switches which value maximum or minimum to display 7 12 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 8 Data Capturing While Realtime Recording 8 1 Setting Parameters This chapter describes the methods to capture the data during the realtime recording The relevant parameters are listed below You will set these parameters using the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed The setting procedure is very similar to that of the memory mode However you can not perform X Y recording or X Y display Setting the Measurement Conditions Setting parameters Description Operation mode Select whether to save the measurement data to memory or realtime record with the built in printer Select Realtime Memory Format Select the recording format from 1 zone 2 zone or 4 zone Memory length The number of data points to capture in one data capture Set in terms of div 80 data div Kind of trigger Select normal trigger or wave window trigger Clear memory at start Select whether or not to clear the measurement data captured previously at the start of the measurement Condition to stop When the trigger mode is repeat select whether to stop the repeat trigger measurement by pressing the STOP key or stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fill the internal memory Operation after data Set the operation after capturing the data once capturing Setting the display fo
175. e vant gt 3 3 5 z IM OR100E 01E App 31 MENU Group RDINterval lt Space gt CONTinue ES lt Space gt WAVE p ame Los p rd ame e p i e co RLENgth lt Space gt lt NRf gt ECS OT g O lt Space gt it lt NRf gt NORMal TRIGger 2 5 F a g TSMag lt Space gt lt NRf gt lt Space gt App 32 IM OR100E 01E MENU Group MENU MENU FORMat Function Queries all menu screen settings Function Sets queries the display format Syntax MENU Syntax MENU FORMat ZONE1 ZONE2 Example MENU MENU MODE MEMORY ZONE4 XY FORMAT ZONE4 ACCUMULATE 0 MENU FORMat CPRINT 0 GAUGE 1 GRID FINE Example MENU FORMAT ZONE1 LINE1 THIN LINE2 THIN MENU FORMAT gt MENU LINE3 THIN LINE4 THIN LOA FORMAT ZONE1 BIT1 1 BIT2 1 BIT3 1 MENU GAUGe BIT4 1 MENU LOB BIT1 1 r F 7 Function Sets queries contents of the gage print BIT2 1 BIT3 1 BIT4 1 MENU Syntax MENU GAUGe lt Boolean gt LOPRINT OFF MBLENGTH 1600 MCLEAR 0 MESSAGE OFF MPCCARD OFF MPRINT 0 MENU GAUGe Example MENU GAUGE ON MENU GAUGE gt MENU GAUGE 1 MSTOP STOPKEY MTDIV SEC5 PMODE ANALOG TPRINT 1 MENU GRID TRIGGER NORMAL TSMAG 3 Function Sets queries the grid setting MSTATIS 0 PLENGTH A5 Syntax MENU GRID OFF SIMPle FINE MENU GRID Example MENU G
176. e On 18 38 Interval Off Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection a Fe FS ra fe Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 5 6 IM OR100E 01E 5 4 Setting the Wave Window Trigger Operating Procedure 1 Setting the kind of trigger Set the kind of trigger to WW Trg F2 key at the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed The time div setting available during wave window trigger is 2 5 or 10 ms div 2 Setting the trigger mode Set the trigger mode with the F1 to F3 keys at the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed Repeat Data is captured every time the trigger occurs Stops when the STOP key is pressed or when the internal memory becomes full Cannot be specified when the memory length is set to PC card Single When the trigger occurs data is captured recorded once Free Pressing the START key starts the data capturing regardless of the trigger conditions Pressing the STOP key stops the data capturing 3 Setting the reference signal Select whether to base the reference signal off an ideal sine wave or an actual input signal Here select the ideal sine wave F1 key 4 Setting the trigger delay Set the Pre trigger trigger delay as a percentage of the memory length 100 to 1 is pre trigger and 1 to 100 is
177. e rsor Start recording Go EA to the Select ike recording previous screen range Select the start end data 3 Bams i Out to ENG ePrinter E ZE Jlora Start recording Go back to the Select output destination previous screen IM OR100E 01E 6 15 Bundes ea E 6 8 Zooming In or Out on the Displayed Waveform Setting Screen Screen for setting the time axis zoom PLAY BACK lt 3 p00 11 975ms exl emsvdiv Block 32 32 Pin ero ee e A jj T Time of the left most Time axis time div Time of the right most part of the display zoom factor part of the display Screen for setting the voltage axis zoom PLAY BACK to TA A Ground level VARIABLE Full scale voltage Zoom out on the voltage axis Zoom factor Zoom in on the voltage axis Operation Keys Displays the captured data 2 1 time axis zoom screen 6 16 IM OR100E 01E 6 8 Zooming In or Out on the Displayed Waveform Operating Procedure 1 Zooming in or out on the time axis Pressing the Time Axis key on the playback screen zooms the waveform Pressing the right side of the Time Div key shortens time div and the waveform is expanded Pressing the left side of the Time Div key lengthens time div and the waveform is reduced The zoom factor that you can specify varies depending on the time div setting time div Zoom fa
178. e descriptions are given on an assumption that you are operating the recorder from the initialized state First initialize the recorder If this is the first time you are using the recorder after purchasing you can skip this step Press the SYSTEM key to display the setting screen SYSTEM General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc On an Data Fite gt Initialize settings Note A complete initialization will reset the setting parameters and the measurement data in the internal memory Save the setting parameters and measurement data to the flash ATA card as necessary To save the data see 10 3 Saving Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 10 5 Saving Loading Setup Data 3 2 IM OR100E 01E 3 3 Displaying the Waveform Input the measurement signal to the input terminal according to the procedures in 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable Pressing the MONITOR key displays the waveform MONTOR Sep 02 97 20 30 ME 1U DIUI 1U DIV 1U DIU A 1U DIVI V Display update rate Automatically set the measurement range NEXT lt according to the input signal Cay Change the display update rate according to the inpu signal IM OR100E 01E 3 3 sJ sN 9UWII S4I4 3 4 Changing the Measurement Range and Sample Rate Setting the Input Type Set the input type according to the item being measured DC DC
179. e following expression BYTEORDER MSBFIRST WORD data x E decimal point position unit MONitor CHANnel lt X gt DPOint decimal point Function Queries the decimal point position of the Decimal point position can be determined by ie MONitor CHANnel lt x gt DPOint current measured data of the specified i i Unit can be determined by analog channel MONITor CHANnel lt x gt UNIT Syntax MONitor CHANnel lt x gt DPOint lt x gt 1 to 4 Example MONITOR CHANNEL1 DPOINT gt 2 gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 41 MONitor Group MONitor PINTerval periodic interval Function _ Sets queries the interval for sampling at a constant period Syntax MONitor PINTerval lt Time gt MONitor PINTerval lt Time gt 0 1S5 0 25 0 5S 1S Example MONITOR PINTERVAL 0 1S MONITOR PINTERVAL MONITOR PINTERVAL 0 100E 00 MONitor PSENd periodic send Function Sends the measured data sampled at a constant period Syntax MONitor PSENd Description Output format 3 lt 3 digit decimal number gt lt data byte string gt lt crlf gt 3 Indicates that the number of characters will be output in a 3 digit decimal ASCH character string lt 3 digit decimal number gt Indicates the total number of bytes where the total is the sum of the data number and the data bytes It is fixed to 014 in this case lt data number gt Outputs the data number as 2 byte data lt dat
180. e message print App 38 MENU MINTerval Sets queries the digital recording interval after capturing the datain App 38 the memory MENU MODE Sets queries the operating mode App 38 MENU MPCCard Sets queries PC card operation after capturing the data in the App 38 memory MENU MPRint Sets queries record setting after capturing the data in the memory App 38 MENU MSTAtis Sets queries parameter calculation after capturing the data in the App 38 memory MENU MSTOp Sets queries the memory stop condition during repeat triggering App 38 IM OR100E 01E gt 3 3 5 x Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page MENU MTDiv Sets queries the time axis rate during the data capture App 38 MENU PLAYback Sets queries the digital recording interval during playback App 39 MENU PLENgth Sets queries record length App 39 MENU PMODe Sets queries record mode App 39 MENU RDINterval Sets queries the digital printing interval during realtime recording App 39 MENU RLENgth Sets queries the length of the realtime recording App 39 MENU RPRint Sets queries the simultaneous recording App 39 MENU RTDiv Sets queries the time axis rate of the realtime recording App 39 MENU STYLe Sets queries the recording method when the recording format is X Y App 39 MENU TPRint Sets queries the time printing App 40 MENU TRIGger Sets queries the kind of trigger App 40 MENU TSMag Sets queries t
181. e next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 6 2 IM OR100E 01E 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation mode Set the operation mode to Memory with the F1 Memory key 2 Setting the memory length Sets the memory length with the F1 to F4 keys Pressing the NEXT key will show the next set of selections The memory length is specified in div units The measurement time and the number of blocks are calculated from the memory length and displayed When PC card is specified the measured data can automatically be written to the flash ATA memory card while capturing the data For details see section 10 4 Writing Data Simultaneously to the Flash ATA Memory Card Block and Memory Linking This instrument divides the internal memory by the specified memory length and captures the data sequentially to the divided memory One unit of the divided memory is called a block By setting the memory length the number of blocks is automatically determined from the length and the internal memory capacity memory capacity for one channel If the memory length is larger the internal memory capacity memories of other channels are linked to capture the data Memory linking limits the number of channels that can be used as shown in the figure below When memories are linked the number of blocks is
182. e start time during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd STARt lt Boolean gt MENU HARMonic TRENd STARt MENU HARMONIC TREND START OFF MENU HARMONIC TREND START MENU HARMONIC TREND START 0 MENU HARMonic TRENd STTime Start Time Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the start time during trend save of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd STTime lt character string gt MENU HARMonic TRENd STTime lt character string gt HH MM HH hour 00 to 23 MM minute 00 to 59 MENU HARMONIC TREND STTIME 01 45 MENU HARMONIC TREND STTIME MENU HARMONIC TREND STTIME 01 45 App 36 IM OR100E 01E MENU HARMonic TRENd SAVE valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the trend save interval of automatic analysis MENU HARMonic TRENd SAVE OFF MIN1 MIN10 MIN30 HOUR1 HOUR24 MENU HARMonic TRENd SAVE MENU HARMONIC TREND SAVE OFF MENU HARMONIC TREND SAVE MENU HARMONIC TREND SAVE OFF MENU HARMonic UNIT valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Description Sets
183. e trigger interval after the start time TRIGger INTerval OFF MIN10 HOUR1 HOUR24 TRIGger INTerval TRIGGER INTERVAL MIN1 TRIGGER INTERVAL TRIGGER INTERVAL MIN1 App 58 IM OR100E 01E TRIGger HARMonic Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Queries all the setting values of the trigger for automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis TRIGGER HARMONIC gt TRIGGER HARMONIC MODE SINGLE KIND CONTENT CONDITION1 CHANNEL 3 LEVEL 4 0 ORDER3 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION2 CHANNEL 1 LEVEL 3 0 ORDER5 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITIONS CHANNEL 3 LEVEL 2 0 ORDER7 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION4 CHANNELOFF TRIGGER HARMONIC SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 LEVEL 3 TRIGger HARMonic MODE valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analy sis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the trigger mode for automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic MODE FREE SING1le REPeat TRIGger HARMonic MODE TRIGGER HARMONIC MODE SINGLE TRIGGER HARMONIC MODE TRIGGER HARMONIC MODE SINGLE TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt CHANnel Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set
184. easurement Data to the PC Memory Setting Screen FILE Card r Save Load PC Card 9MByte 1 Mode 2 Funct ion Save Binary 3 File name Execute 4 Comment Save option 5 Mode Off 6 Save CH CH1 Yes CH2 Yes CH3 Yes CH4 Yes 7 Limit 0 188 Data Pare Operation Keys FT PRINT COPY HCHO BNE K S F oO 3 H DI A e START T stor Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters select input characters 10 4 IM OR100E 01E 10 3 Saving the Measurement Date to the PC Memory Card Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the data Select the data type with the F1 Data or F2 Panel key Select F1 Data key to select measurement data 2 Setting the function Select the operation Select either F1 Save B or F2 Save A or Next key followed by the F1 All blocks key Save B Save measurement data in binary format extension dat Save A Save measurement data in ASCII format extension csv All blocks Save measured data of all blocks in binary format extension dat Steps 3 to 7 are not necessary when selecting all blocks Note The OR100E OR300E cannot load files that are saved in ASCII format 3 Setting the f
185. eat select whether to press the STOP key to stop the measurement or stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fill the internal memory Operation after data capturing Set the operation after capturing the data once Setting the display format Setting parameters Description Format Select 1 zone 2 zone or 4 zone Accumulate display Select whether or not to accumulate the waveform Logic Channel selection Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the display position of the logic channel Set only when using X Y format Set the Y axis to channel 2 3 or 4 Setting the recording format Setting parameters Description Format Select 1 zone 2 zones or 4 zones Record mode Select whether to record the analog waveform or the digital values Record length Select whether to record the captured data in 10 mm div or expand reduce to A4 or A5 size to record This parameter is invalid when recording digital values Interval time Set only when recording digital values Sets the recording interval Gauge record Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording Grid Select the grid type Time record Set whether or not to record the time record of the captured data Channel message Select whether or not to record comments or measurement range information Channel record Select wheth
186. een the measurement input terminals to exceed the following values Measurement input voltage 250 Vrms Also never allow the sum of the floating voltage and the measurement input voltage to exceed 250 Vrms If voltages exceeding these values are applied across the measurement input terminal it may damage the input circuit e Use an external sensor that comply with IEC1010 1 when measuring current For safety use an external sensor that is enclosed in a case and whose wires are isolated from the case Also make sure that the sensor has a sufficient withstand voltage against the voltage to be measured Use of a bare sensor may cause an electric shock if the sensor is touched accidentally e If you are going to use a clamp type sensor make sure you are fully aware of the voltage to be measured sensor s specifications and handling method so that the possibility of dangers such as electric shocks are avoided IM OR100E 01E 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable For Temperature Measurement When using a type K thermocouple to measure temperature you will need the temperature input adapter 788041 that is sold separately Connect the thermocouple and the temperature input adapter in the following fashion Low High Temperature input adapter 788041 Use a thermocouple with a cross sectional area between 0 14 and 2 5 mm CAUTION Applying a voltage that exceeds the maximum input voltage 42 V DC AC peak to the inp
187. ement data high resolution and wide dynamic range Communication Function This instrument is equipped with an RS 232 interface You can send the measurement data as well as the setting parameters to a personal computer In addition you can change setting parameters and control the recording and data capturing operations through the RS 232 interface PC Card Function You can send the measurement data and screen data over the FAX modem You can also save measurement data binary or ASCII format setting parameters and screen data BMP data format to a flash ATA memory card of up to 40 MB In addition you can read the saved measurement data from the flash ATA memory card to display and record the data or load the setting parameters and configure the OR100E OR300E IM OR100E 01E 1 2 System Configuration External Input Output You can input or output the following signals at the external input output terminals located on the upper panel External Trigger Output This is the trigger signal output to other equipment External Trigger Input This is the signal used to externally trigger this instrument You can use the external trigger input output to operate up to four OR series synchronously External Sampling Clock You can input a clock in this terminal to externally control the sample rate when capturing data Start Stop Signal This is an external signal used to start and atop the recorder IM OR100E 0
188. en Copy action BMP file SYSTEM Expansion calc On To Next page oe ee E E Display language English Tag Off Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Invalid Key lock Off Display grid On WW trg level change Off Start time 8 End time 8 Change level CH1 CH2 0 CH3 CHA 0 ESC To Self test oe E A Self test H1 Key test H2 Memory test 3 Printer test Ach Model Ver 28 ESC m e Hs I Testing the Keys Testing the printer Go back to Testing the memory the first screen IM OR100E 01E 13 11 Bunooys jqnoiL Buns pue ssueuazue N 13 3 Testing the Recorder Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the self test screen At the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next page and press the F1 OK key Highlight Self Test and press the F1 OK key A screen for selecting the test items appears 2 Selecting the self test item Select the self test item with the F2 to F4 keys Testing the Keys This test checks whether the panel keys are operating properly Pressing the F2 key at step 2 displays a representation of the panel keys on the screen Pressing a key should highlight the corresponding key on the screen If it does not the keys may be malfunctioning Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back c
189. ency 5 HZ Display Content Power Wiring gt 142W CH1 CH2 a a a cl TRIGGER m Trigg Mode at Syne CH CH t 2 4 Kind THDCIEC Level B 3 i CH 1 CH 1 5 B che E cH3 6 E off Free Single Repeat Displays the setting menu Operation Keys rm Makes a selection N F8 r2 Displays the next set of selections ree CS PRINT L frcm 2 Moves between setting parameters EREIEIEIG 5 12 IM OR100E 01E 5 6 Setting Trigger for Automatic Analysis of Harmonics Operating Procedure 1 Setting the trigger mode Set the trigger with the F1 to F3 keys at the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed Free Pressing the START key starts the data capturing regardless of the trigger conditions Pressing the STOP key stops the data capturing Single When the trigger occurs data are captured recorded once Repeat Data are captured every time the trigger occurs Stops when the STOP key is pressed or when the internal memory becomes full Cannot be specified when the memory length set to PC card 2 Setting synchronous channels Set the synchronous channels for capturing the data to be analyzed with F1 to F4 keys 3 Setting levels of synchronous channels Set the levels of the synchronous channels in terms of percentage
190. ent Register The standard event register is provided for eight different kinds of event which can occur inside the instrument Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 when any of the bits in this register becomes 1 or when the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register becomes 1 Examples 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 Bit 5 ESB of the status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 It is also possible to check what type of event has occurred inside the instrument by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading from the Standard Event Register The contents of the standard event register can be read by the ESR command After completion of the read out the register will be cleared Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared in the following three cases When the contents of the standard event register are read using ESR When the CLS command is received When power is turned ON again App 68 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Extended Event Register Reading the extended event register tells you whether changes in the condition register reflecting internal conditions have occurred A filter can be applied which allows you to decide which events are reported to the extended event register FiLTer lt x gt 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Condi
191. er level of the wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize LEVel lt NR gt TRIGger SYNChronize LEVel lt NR gt 100t0100 Example TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE TRIGger STTime Start Time Function Sets Queries start time of the time trigger function i LEVEL 100 Syntax TRIGger STTime lt character i TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE LEVEL string gt TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE TRIGger STTime A LEVEL 100 lt character string gt HH MM HH Hour 00 to 23 TRIGger TIME MM Min 00 to 59 Function Sets Queries whether or not to use the time Example TRIGGER STTIME 03 09 trigger function TRIGGER STTIME TRIGGER Syntax TRIGger TIME lt Boolean gt STTIME 03 09 TRIGger TIME Example TRIGGER TIME OFF TRIGGER TIME TRIGGER TIME 0 TRIGger SYNChronize Function Queries all setting values relating to the synchronization trigger of the wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize Example TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 EDGE HIGH LEVEL 21 TRIGger SYNChronize CHANnel Function _Sets Queries the synchronization trigger channel of the wave window trigger Syntax TRIGger SYNChronize CHANne l lt NR gt RIGger SYNChronize CHANnel lt NR gt 1 to 4 Example TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL TRIGGER SYNCHRONIZE CHANNEL 1 n 4 gt 3 ke 5
192. er or not to record the channel numbers or tags Line Set the thickness of the line used to record the analog waveform Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the record position of the logic channel lt x o 3 e 2 gt gt 2 lt Q o 9 1 Setting Parameters Automatic analysis Perform harmonic analysis automatically Conditions on capturing the measurement data Setting parameters Description Operation mode Set to Harmonic Analysis method Set to Auto Frequency Set the frequency of the power supply being measured Selecting Auto will automatically estimate the frequency from the measured signal Display contents Select what to display from the results of the automatic analysis Wiring method Select the wiring method Operation after data capturing Set the operation after capturing the data once Saving results of analysis Select whether or not to save the results of the analysis at certain intervals to the flash ATA memory card Start time stop time Select the start and stop times when saving the results of the analysis at certain intervals to the flash ATA memory card Parameters under analysis to save Select what parameters to save when saving the results of the analysis at certain intervals to the flash ATA memory card Setting display format Setting Recording format The display and
193. erly by following the instructions in 2 5 Loading the Chart Unplug the power cord after Use When the recorder is not used for a long time If you are not going to use the recorder for a long time remove the batteries AA size alkaline dry cell NiMH battery from the recorder Malfunction Immediately stop the use of the recorder if there are any symptoms of malfunction such as unusual sounds smell or smoke coming from the recorder Turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cord If you notice abnormal symptoms contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual IM OR100E 01E uoneiodo a10jog D 2 1 Handling Precautions Precautions on Handling the Printer Head Printer Head s Temperature To protect the head the printing load will automatically be reduced if the printer head s temperature exceeds a prescribed level When the printer head s temperature goes back down the print intensity will return to normal Dirty Printer Head The printer head may become dirty over long periods of operation causing the printout to blur in some places In this case clean the printer head as described in 13 4 Cleaning the Printer Head Printer Head s Life The life of the printer head is about 50 km about 5000 chart rolls Operation beyond this point may cause the print quality to go down To replace the printer head contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Power Save Printing The pr
194. erval when recording the captured data Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the recording of the logic channel to ON OFF Recording format of X Y Setting parameters Description Operation mode Format Select whether to save the measurement data to memory or realtime record with the built in printer Select Realtime Select the recording format Select XY Style Set only when using X Y format Set the line style to record Record format Sets whether or not to realtime record Set to ON Gauge record Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording Grid Select the grid type Time record Set whether or not to record the time record of the captured data Channel message Select whether or not to record comments or measurement range information Channel record Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Channel selection Set only when using X Y format Set the Y axis to channel 2 3 or 4 IM OR100E 01E 7 1 7 6uip1039y WILY Analog Waveform Setting Screen Operation Keys oOn CONOW mMenu Mode Format Length Continue Sametime print Off Gauge print On Logic 1234 Grid Fine CH A B BBA 11 Time print On CH B B B BA CH message Off Pos Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin
195. es and Characters Chapter 2 Before Operation 24 Handling Precautions c scccssvescsonevesccsccsvaccascaccecaassevsannaccevsoucetacentessenesvevteenscaenacetesneens 2 1 22 Installing th Recorder icen rm aee ieee ees ee ee ee 2 3 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable ee we 2 4 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF oo eect eeeeeeeeceeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeaees 2 11 2 5 Loading the Chart acces cacti nei elie Minas sateen Sai 2 20 26 Setting the Dateand Time s cstei teiesvecveetelie sees fetetese vistas beets vei eevee 2 23 Chapter 3 First time Users Silt Settins Procedures 2c coe a Mints ces cals este e eth Wes tier eda 3 1 3 2 Setting Of formatice acl As hates japtedais vasa ET T EEE Beate gots ee 3 2 3 3 Displaying the Waveform 0 0 ccceescesseseseseeeeseeseseeseeecseeaesecsesaeseescsetseeesaeeaseesaeeaens 3 3 3 4 Changing the Measurement Range and Sample Rate we 3 4 3 5 Setting the Trg Ser persenan h etae sth ame aR 3 6 3 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data oe eeeceseeseeecseeeeeeeseeetseeseeerseeeeneeaees 3 7 Chapter 4 Setting the Measurement Range Filter Time Axis and Linear Scaling A gt Setting Parameters sai erni ioa E NEEE EE RAE EE E a 4 1 42 Setting the Input Coupling verienenn a r ar EER E E N a 4 2 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range e sseessesssssstsrersrsrststerristststerersrerernrsrereererrererere 4 4 4 4 Setting the Filter NULL Position and Zoom Factor eessssesssessessrses
196. et the condition with the F1 and F2 keys Stop key Overwrite the data until the STOP key is pressed Memory Full Stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fill the memory If you start the data capture in the middle of the internal memory the data is captured up to the block immediately before the block you started on 8 Setting the operation after data capturing 9 The following operation is performed automatically after capturing one block of measurement data Use the F1 Off and F2 On keys to set the operation Print output Record with the built in printer The recording format is the most recent format specified in either memory mode realtime memory mode or at the waveform analysis of the harmonic mode PC card Send the measurement data over FAX modem or save the data to the flash ATA memory card For details see 10 3 Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem Saving results to the flash ATA memory card Set whether or not to automatically save the results of the analysis to the flash ATA memory card upon completing the analysis Use F1 to F4 keys to make the selection Off Does not save to the flash ATA memory card 1 min 10 min 30 min 1 hour 24 hour Save the results of the analysis over specified interval If you selected anything other than Off then select which parameters under anal
197. f the specified logic Syntax DATA TRIGger channel of the specified waveform Example DATA TRIGGER 100 Syntax DATA LOA LOB SEND Description Cannot query during memory measurement one re DATA TTIMe Trigger Time escription oma p Function Queries the trigger time of the specified PELELECEEELE nae E L lolololol hilh i fer ir Syntax DATA TTIMe eo The measured values are separated by Example DATA TTIME OX2C and output for each data No 39 1997 04 12 23 46 12 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 25 FILE Group FILE Group The commands in the FILE group are used load or save the setup data and the measured data O vA lt Space gt lt character strin 1a Cno BE 2 ial ae ED d C on lt NRf gt S J x FILE FILE SAVE ALL Function Queries all the setting values relating to Function Saves all blocks measured data in binary saving and loading format Syntax FILE Syntax FILE SAVE ALL Example FILE FILE SAVE Example FILE SAVE ALL CHANNEL1 YES CHANNEL2 YES CHANNEL3 YES CHANNEL4 YES COMMENT OR100E My END 100 OPTTION 0 START 0 FILE LOAD PANel Function Loads the setup data Syntax FILE LOAD PANel lt Character gt lt Character string data gt filename 8 characters or less Example FILE LOA
198. fied channel CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing UNIT Sets queries the scaling unit for the specified channel App 20 CHANne1 lt X gt TAG Sets queries the tag character string for the specified channel App 20 CHANne1 lt X gt UPPScale Sets queries the upper limit scale for temperature measurements App 21 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate Queries all the communication settings App 21 COMMunicate HEADer Sets queries whether or not the header is returned in response App 21 to a query COMMunicate LOCKout Set releases local lockout App 22 COMMunicate REMote Sets remote local ON is remote App 22 COMMunicate STATus Queries status specific to the line App 22 COMMunicate VERBose Sets queries whether the response to a query is returned in full App 22 or abbreviated form COMMunicate WAIT Waits for any of the specified extended events to occur App 22 COMMunicate WAIT Generate a response when any of the specified extended events App 22 occur IM OR100E 01E App 9 gt 3 3 5 x Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page DATA Group DATA Queries all settings relating to the output of the memory data App 23 DATA BLOCk Sets queries the block number of the waveform to be sent App 23 DATA BYTeorder Sets queries the byte order when sending data in word format App 24 DATA CHANnel lt x gt RANge Queries the measurement range and full scale value of the specified App 24 analog cha
199. g 13 0 Troubleshooting s eve S chek Ae le E ciii dae econ EA 13 1 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures 00 ccceeesceeseeseeeceeseessceeseeecseeaeesseeesseseeseeases 13 3 13 3 Testing the Recorder cs 2se250 csee2s seed secon hea tii ethan debeeent elses dt told 13 11 13 4 Cleaning the Printer Headsin hiii iea iii E 13 14 Chapter 14 Specifications 14 1 Measurement Input 142 Memory Function sigro rerieriieiiieo kin a rean EE EERE ER 143 RECON k aae e r E EEREN AE E EEE RARER 14 4 Realtime Recorder amp Memory sseesesesesesseseesrerrssstsrstststststsesrsteenenreresessstntnisestees 14 8 14 5 Trigger 14 6 Display 14 7 Harmonic Analysis OR300E esssesssssssssssessssesssessesessssesesessrsssessesesernesesessesesesees 14 11 14 8 Other Specifications rer eroii a EAER A E E ER ERN 14 12 14 9 General Specifications 14 13 14 10 External Dimensions isesi tesina e a ei a 14 16 Appendix Appendix 1 Communication Commands cccecessseeseseesceesseeseseesceeeseeeeseseceeseeesseeaes App 1 Index Index aevnnndien Siatiiiwataiitnti cates chia intin sieht ea fond Index 1 10 IM OR100E 01E Chapter1 Overview 1 1 Names of the Parts and Their Functions Chart paper exit section Chart paper cover LCD Measurement input terminal YOKOGAWA Low High CH2 Low High CH3 Low High CH4 Low
200. g count 6 Sampling count i Trigger detected Secor it ec Meee eeee FN few oe ager are ah aN ae afin a SN SR level aaa i 2 Trigger condition Trigger condition satisfied Trigger point satisfied Measurement period Trigger condition unsatisfied Trigger of Automatic Harmonic Analysis This trigger is valid only during the automatic analysis in harmonic mode Trigger occurs when the harmonic distortion or the relative harmonic content exceeds the specified level IM OR100E 01E EN 1 5 Harmonic Analysis Function Measures the voltage and current of the power supply and performs harmonic analysis The results of the analysis are displayed with a bar graph or with digital values There are two types of analyzing methods on this recorder Specify the range and analyze Harmonic analysis is performed over one cycle of acquired data from an arbitrary point This is useful when you wish to look over the waveform before performing the analysis The results can be saved to a file in CSV format Note CSV files are data files which contain data separated by commas These files can be opened with spreadsheet applications Analyze automatically Upon acquiring one cycle of measured data analysis is performed and the result is displayed This operation repeats automatically The results can be saved to the built in PC card in ASCII format Harmonic analysis on power can also be performed 1 12 IM OR100E 01E 1 6
201. g2 Calculation takes more time when you have the expansion calc set to ON Average value Area calculation value Integ1 Maximum value AUG RMS Area calculation value Integ2 RMS value Minimum value Measurement time A AAL 13 225ms Shows the calculation value if expansion calculation is turned ON About auto calculation If the interval calculation of operation after data capturing in 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data is set to ON interval statistical calculation on the entire range of the block is performed and displayed after capturing one block of data Also if the print output of operation after data capturing is set to ON along with the interval calculation the result of the interval statistical calculation can be automatically printed IM OR100E 01E 6 21 6 10 Calculating Statistics Area Calculation If you set Expansion calc to ON at the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed the results of the following area calculations are displayed e Integl Calculates the negative portion as a negative area Area S S1 S3 S2 e Integ2 Ignores the negative portion Area S Si S2 Calculation when displaying the captured data in X Y format When displaying the captured data in X Y format the area of the waveform is calculated in stead of calculating statistics The operation proce
202. ge Actual input signal Measurement signal If you set the input to RMS on the OR300E you cannot set NULL If you change the input type during data capturing the NULL setting is cancelled 3 Adjusting the position Press the POSITION key to adjust the position of the current input waveform Adjusting the position changes the upper and lower limits of the scale values by the corresponding amount but the measurement range is not changed The following example shows the case when the waveform position is moved lower by 0 5 V at 5 V range 5 50 V 500V AA aA AAC a a Sc RR VF i 4 50 V BOON A EAR Saree eee aero mae If you change the input from DC to RMS or vice versa on the OR300E position setting is reset 4 Setting the zoom factor of the voltage axis of the displayed waveform Pressing the Zoom key at the screen that appears when one the CH1 to CH4 keys is pressed displays a screen for setting the zoom factor of the voltage axis Select the zoom factor using the F2 up and F3 down keys Changing the zoom factor changes the V DIV setting IM OR100E 01E 4 7 Buljeos 1e u17 pue sixy owl a 14 obuey JUowsisnsesyy y Buas al 4 5 Setting the Time Axis Sample Rate Chart Speed Setting Screen to 1V DIV 2 5 0QU 3 5 QU 1V DIV 3 5 QU 4 5 0QU 1V DIV 4 5 0QU x1 T DIU Operation Keys Displays the sett
203. gger Select the kind of trigger with F1 and F2 keys See chapter 5 Triggering 6 Setting how to handle the memory at the start of the data capture Select ON or OFF with F1 and F2 keys On Clear the measurement data captured previously Off Capture the data to the next block after the previous data 7 Setting the condition to stop the repeat trigger Set only when the trigger is set to repeat Set the stop condition with F1 and F2 keys Stop Key Overwrite the data until the STOP key is pressed Memory Full Stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fill the memory If you start the data capture in the middle of the internal memory the data is captured up to the block immediately before the block you started on 8 Setting the operation after data capturing The following operation is performed automatically after capturing one block of measurement data Use the F1 Off and F2 On keys to set the operation Print output Record with the built in printer The recording format is the format specified in 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform PC card Send the measurement data over FAX modem or save the data to the flash ATA memory card For details see 10 3 Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem IM OR100E 01E sishjeuy d1uOWIeH 9 3 Setting Conditions to
204. gital recording interval after capturing the data in the memory Syntax MENU MINTerval lt NRf gt MENU MINTerval lt NR gt 1 10 100 Example MENU MINTERVAL 1 MENU MINTERVAL MENU INTERVAL 1 MENU MODE Function Sets queries the operating mode Syntax MENU MODE MEMory REALTime REALMem HARMonic MENU MODE Example MENU MODE MEMORY MENU MODE MENU MODE MEMORY Description HARMonic is only available on the OR300E MENU MPCCard valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries PC card operation after capturing the data in the memory MENU MPCCard OFF SAVE FAX MENU MPCCard MENU MPCCARD SAVE MENU MPCCARD MENU MPCCARD SAVE MENU MPRint valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries record setting after capturing the data in the memory MENU MPRint lt Boolean gt MENU MPRint MENU MPRINT OFF MENU MPRINT MENU MPRINT 0 MENU MSTAtis valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries parameter calculation after capturing the data in the memory MENU MSTAtis lt Boolean gt MENU MSTAtis MENU MSTATIS ON MENU MSTATIS MENU MSTATIS 1 MENU MSTOp valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries the memory stop condition during repeat triggeri
205. gt 1 to 4 Example STATIS CHANNEL AVG 3 1 23mv Description If calculation is not performed Off is returned If the result is abnormal is returned STATIS CHANnel lt X gt INTEG1 Function Queries the INTEG1 value of calculation result of the specified analog ch Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt INTEG1 lt X gt 1 to 4 Example STATIS CHANNEL1 INTEG1 3 1 23 Description If calculation is not performed Off is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs CHANnel lt X gt INTEG2 Function Queries the INTEG2 value of calculation result of the specified analog ch Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt INTEG2 lt X gt 1 to 4 Example STATIS CHANNEL1 INTEG2 1 234 Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs Group STATIS CHANnel lt X gt MAX Function Queries the maximum value of the calculation result of the specified analog CH and the time the value was measured Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt MAX lt X gt 1 to 4 STATIS CHANNEL1 MAX 3 1 23V 2 3ms Example Description lt maximum value gt lt time of measurement gt If calculation is not performed Off is returned If the result is abnormal is returned STATIS CHANnel lt X gt
206. gt PHASe returned Function Queries the power phase of each harmonic If calculation is abnormal is order from the results of the harmonic returned analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt PHASe lt X1 gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only for single phase two wire CH3 CH4 lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Harmonic order Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 ORDER3 PHASE gt 3 33deg Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is gt 3 ke 5 x returned IM OR100E 01E App 47 STATIs Group STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS Function Queries the effective power of each harmonic order from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS lt X1 gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only for single phase two wire CH3 CH4 lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Harmonic order STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 ORDER3 RMS gt 3 5V Example Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt PFACtor Function Queries the power factor from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt PFACtor lt X gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only for single phase two wire CH3 CH4 Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1
207. h the NEXT key Turn off the power switch 714 Local lockout You can release the local lockout carrying out the followings Push the NEXT key Turn off the power switch 715 Key has been locked Keys are locked To operate the keys release the key lock 802 Setting out of range The specified value exceeds the allowable range 803 Cannot set data The specified value exceeds the allowable range 805 Illegal data exists The computation was aborted because there was data outside the range Change the computation range 6 19 806 Parameter error Incorrect parameter in the communication command or cannot execute in the present condition Change the parameter setting App 1 to App 57 807 Mode error Issued a communication command that is not allowed in the current mode App 1 to App 56 808 Cannot set it while running Issued a communication command that is not allowed in the current mode App 1 to App 56 809 CH2 memory unavailable Linking two channels of memory 2 channel model 6 3 810 CH2 4 memory unavailable Linking two channels of memory 4 channel model 6 3 811 CH2 3 4 memory unavailable Linking four channels of memory 4 channel model 6 3 IM OR100E 01E 13 5 Bunooys jqnoiL Buns pue ssueuazureN 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Status Messages
208. hannels 3 and 4 to the lower zone 4 zone Display Record channels 1 2 3 and 4 in order from the top zone 2 Setting the chart speed Set the chart speed used during realtime recording in time div The maximum chart speed that can be selected varies depending on the time div setting time div Sample rate Maximum Chart Speed 2 s div 40 S s 2 s div 5 s div 16 S s 5 s div 10 s div 8 S s 10 s div 30 s div 2 67 S s 30 s div 1 min div 1 33 S s 1 min div 2 min div 0 667 S s 2 min div 3 Setting the operation after data capturing Set the operation to perform after capturing one block of measurement data with the F1 and F2 keys Set the print output to ON Print output Record the captured data with the built in printer PC card Send the measurement data over FAX modem or save the data to the PC card For details see 10 3 Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 11 9 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem card Note The settings for recording the digital values are the same as in the memory mode IM OR100E 01E 8 3 Hulpsooay owiyjeoy llyM Burunjdeg eyed 8 3 Starting Stopping Operating Procedure 1 Starting the measurement Pressing the START key starts the measurement and records the waveform with the built in printer in realtime The measurement data is displayed on the screen but the back lighting turns off and the screen darkens N
209. harmonic content levels for the trigger conditions The parameter for checking the levels harmonic lt amp Condition 4 distortion or relative harmonic content is Harmonic Trigger to common across all conditions Time You cannot use the manual trigger while using the harmonic trigger IM OR100E 01E 1 7 N 1 4 Trigger Function Triggering You can set the following types of trigger conditions to trigger realtime recording and data capturing Types There are three major types of triggers Normal trigger Edge trigger level trigger external signal time Wave window trigger Edge trigger level trigger Rise Fall High Low Bi slope trigger Win out Win in Logic trigger Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal changes from below the predefined trigger level to above the trigger level Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal changes from above the predefined trigger level to below the trigger level Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal is above the predefined trigger level Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal is below the predefined trigger level Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal changes from below the predefined trigger level to above the trigger level or from above the predefined level to below the trigger level Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal moves out of the
210. hat came with the recorder e Before connecting the power cord check that the voltage on the supply side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder e Before connecting the power cord check that the OR100E OR300E is turned OFF e When not using the recorder for a long time unplug the power cord of the AC adapter Only use the AC adapter from YOKOGAWA Model No 788011 Do not put objects on top of the AC adapter or the power cord Also do not let heat generating objects come in contact with them e When unplugging the power cord do not pull on the power cord Always hold the plug If the power cord becomes damaged contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual 2 12 IM OR100E 01E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF Procedures on Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Check that the power switch is turned OFF 2 Attach the clamp filter that came with the AC adapter to the output side of the cable of the AC adapter see figure below DC output side Connects to the OR100E OR300E Clamp filter A1193MN uoneiodo a10jog 3 Connect the optional AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on the recorder 4 Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of the AC adapter 5 Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following specifications The power outlet should be a three pole type with a protective gro
211. he T axis zoom factor for memory display and App 40 recording MENU XY lt X gt Sets queries the Y axis input Y1 to Y3 of the X Y recording App 40 lt X gt 1 to 3 corresponds to Y1 to Y3 MONitor Group MONitor Queries all setting values relating to the current measured data App 41 output MONitor BYTeorder Sets queries the byte order when sending data in word format App 41 MONItor CHANnel lt X gt DPOint Queries the decimal point position of the current measured data of App 41 the specified analog channel MONItor CHANne1 lt X gt UNIT Queries the unit of the current measured data of the specified analog App 41 channel MONItor FORMat Sets queries format of the data to send App 41 MONItor PINTerval Sets queries the interval for sampling at a constant period App 42 MONItor PSENd Sends the measured data sampled at a constant period App 42 MONItor SEND Sends the current measured data App 42 PASSword Group PASSword CHANge Changes the password App 43 PASSword INPut Enters the password App 43 SELFtest Group SELFtest MEMory Performs memory test and query the result App 43 SELFtest PCCard Performs PC card test and query the result App 43 SELFtest PRINter Performs printer test App 43 STATIs Group STATIs Queries all setting values relating to statistical calculation App 45 STATIs CHANne1 lt X gt AVG Queries the average value of the calculation result of the specified App 45 analog CH ST
212. he date time and time of the data capture on the time axis 6 Setting the channel message Select the message to record at the start of the data recording from the following Off Do not record channel messages Comment Record the comment set at the screen that appears when the channel key is pressed CH info Record the measurement range 7 Setting the channel record Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Tag is set at the screen that appears when the channel key is pressed Switching between channel number and tag is done on the next page of the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed For details see 12 5 Setting Tags or 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments 8 Setting the line for recording Select thin medium or thick line for each channel IM OR100E 01E 6 11 Bundes ea E 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Setting Screen for Displaying Captured Data PLAY BACK sii Trigger position pe a Displayed range Time of the left most part of the display Time axis zoom 4 sa iile Time of the right most part of the display factor hh _ ext ems div Cursor display Record the prm Jlourbor look Jaro J T1575n Displayed block No Blocktt 32742 _ Total number of blocks Select the block Set the calculation captured data ti di ime div
213. he harmonic distortion IEC of each analog channel from App 46 the results of the harmonic analysis STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD2 Queries the harmonic distortion CSA of each analog channel from App 46 the results of the harmonic analysis STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt TRMS Queries the total RMS value of each analog channel from the results App 47 of the harmonic analysis STATIs HARMonic EXECute Executes the harmonic analysis App 47 STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt ACTPower Queries the total active power from the results of the harmonic App 47 analysis STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt APPPower Queries the apparent power from the results of the harmonic analysis App 47 STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent Queries the relative power content of each harmonic order from the App 47 results of the harmonic analysis STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt PHASe Queries the power phase of each harmonic order from the results of App 47 the harmonic analysis STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS Queries the active power of each harmonic order from the results App 48 of the harmonic analysis STATIS HARMonic POWer lt X gt PFACtor Queries the power factor from the results of the harmonic analysis App 48 STATIS HARMonic POWer lt X gt REACtpower Queries the reactive power from the results of the harmonic analysis App 48
214. he keys as described in section 13 4 13 12 If it is not working properly the recorder needs servicing Measurement values are Noise may be picked up Check the installation erroneous environment Also check if the following measures are taken to reduce the noise The recorder is grounded The functional ground of the equipment under measurement is connected to that of the recorder Check the input filter settings 4 4 4 5 Check whether the linear scaling function is being used 4 8 4 9 Allow 30 minutes for the recorder to warm up after turning ON the power to make accurate measurements The printout is faint Check that you are using the proper type of thermal paper 2 Check the printer head as described in section 13 4 13 14 If it is not working properly the recorder needs servicing The life of the printer head is about 50 km described in section 2 2 dust may get trapped between the printer head and paper and damage the head In this case the recorder needs servicing about 5000 chart rolls Operation beyond this point may 4 cause the print quality to go down re To replace the printer head contact your nearest S YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this D manual gt If the recorder is not installed in an environment as 2 3 3 H Buns pue eoueuajuley IM OR100E 01E 13 1 13 1 Troubleshooting Problem Things to Check Reference Page
215. he setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 5 4 IM OR100E 01E 5 3 Setting the Logic Trigger and Other Triggers Operating Procedure 1 Setting the kind of trigger Set the kind of trigger to Normal F1 key at the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed 2 Setting the logic trigger Set the logic trigger At the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed set the AND OR between the bits of the logic channel with the F1 to F3 keys Off Disable the trigger function OR Triggers if the trigger condition of any one bit is met AND Triggers if the trigger conditions of all bits are met Set the trigger condition of each bit from the following list with the F1 to F4 and NEXT keys 0 Triggers on 0 Triggers on 1 Triggers on the leading edge Triggers on the trailing edge x eom Ignore the bit 3 Setting the filter Set the filter with the F1 to F3 keys Off Disable the filter function On Triggers when the trigger conditions are consecutively satisfied the specified number of times of measurement Timeout Triggers when the trigger conditions are not satisfied within the specified number of times of measurement 4 Setting the external trigger Set the trigger condition of the external trigger with the F1 to F3 keys
216. hen the MENU key is pressed 2 Setting the trigger mode Set the trigger mode with the F1 to F3 keys at the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed Free Pressing the START key starts the data capturing regardless of the trigger conditions Pressing the STOP key stops the data capturing Single When the trigger occurs data is captured recorded once Repeat Data is captured every time the trigger occurs Stops when the STOP key is pressed or when the internal memory becomes full Cannot be specified when the memory length is set to PC card 3 Setting the trigger delay Set the Pre trigger trigger delay as a percentage of the memory length 100 to 1 is pre trigger and 1 to 100 is trigger delay Fixed to 0 when the memory length is set to PC card 4 Setting AND OR Set whether the trigger is set off when all the trigger conditions are met AND or when any of the trigger conditions is met OR with the F1 or F2 key Logic trigger external trigger start time trigger and interval time trigger are included 5 Setting the trigger type Select the trigger type from the following list using the F1 to F4 and NEXT keys Off Disable trigger function Rise Triggers when the trigger level is crossed on the leading edge Fall Triggers when the trigger level is crossed on the trailing edge High level Triggers when above the trigger level
217. ic distortion IEC of each analog channel from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD1 lt X gt 1 to 4 Channel Example STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 THD1 3 3 33 Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD2 Function Queries the harmonic distortion CSA of each analog channel from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD2 lt X gt 1 to 4 Channel STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 THD2 3 3 33 Example Description If calculation is not performed of f is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned App 46 IM OR100E 01E STATIs Group STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt STATIs HARMonic POWer lt xX gt TRMS Total RMS APPPower Function Queries the total RMS value of each analog Function Queries the apparent power from the results channel from the results of the harmonic of the harmonic analysis analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic POWer lt X gt Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt APPPower TRMS lt X gt 1 to 2 2 is valid only lt X gt 1 to 4 Channel for single phase two wire Example STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 CH3 CH4 TRMS 3 3 5V Example STATIS HARMONIC POWER1 Description If calculation is not performed off is APPP
218. ilename Set the filename with eight characters or less You can use alphanumeric characters and special characters amp _ If lower case characters are used for the file name they are converted to upper case characters If you perform harmonic analysis on the OR300E the results of the analysis are saved automatically when you save the measured data in binary format The file name containing the results is file name of measured data csv If you save all blocks the file names are assigned as follows BLKAAABB dat AAA With one save operation the files are numbered automatically from 000 to 999 The number returns to 000 after 999 BB Block number 4 Setting comments Set comments with 16 characters or less as necessary 5 Setting the range to save You can save the measurement data by specifying the channel and the range if the mode is set to ON If set to OFF the specified channel and range are invalid 6 Setting the channel to save Set whether or not to save the channel by specifying Yes or No for each channel If Yes is specified the measurement data for that channel is saved 7 Setting the range to save Set the range of the block to save as a percentage of the data length 8 Executing the save Highlighting Execute and pressing the F1 Execute key saves the measurement data A message Accessing file is displayed while it is saving Data that is saved is the meas
219. include a header Example STATUS ERROR lt PMT gt gt 0 NO ERROR lt RMT gt When you want a response without a header You can have the header removed from a response that has a header and data by using the COMMunicate HEADer command Abbreviated form Usually the lower case letter portion of a response header is abbreviated when it is returned You can have it not abbreviate the lower case letters by using the COMMunicate VERBosecommand Response Data Data Data The data section comes after the header A space must be included between the header and the data The data contains conditions and values It is classified as follows Data Description lt Decimal gt Value expressed as a decimal number Example Trigger delay value TRIGger DELay 20 Physical value Example Measurement range of CH2 CHANnel2 RANGe 100MV Register value expressed in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value gt STATus EESE HFE Specified character string mnemonic Select from Example CH1 input selection CHANnel1 INPut OFFIDCIGND Indicates ON OFF Specify with ON OFF or a value Example Turn ON CH3 scaling CHANnel3 SCALing MODE ON Arbitrary character string Example CH4 Tag string CHANnel4 TAG ABCDEF lt Voltage gt lt Time gt lt Frequency gt lt Register gt lt Character data gt lt Boolean gt
220. ing menu PRINT COPY 000E Decreases the time div Increases the time div 4 8 IM OR100E 01E 4 5 Setting the Time Axis Sample Rate Chart Speed Operating Procedure Setting the time axis The time axis is set in terms of the time with respect to 1 div Press the time axis key at the measurement range setting screen that appears when the one of the CH1 to CH4 keys is pressed Pressing the right side of the key decreases the time div sample rate chart speed are increased Pressing the left side of the key increases the time div sample rate chart speed are decreased The time axis setting in the harmonic mode is determined automatically from the frequency of the target waveform Note The time axis can be set on the following screens Screen that appears when one of the CH1 to CH4 keys is pressed Screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed If you press the time axis key on the playback screen it will zoom in or out on the waveform Sample rate does not change The range for setting the time div varies depending on the measurement mode When the measurement mode is Memory or Memory amp Realtime 200 us to 2 min When the measurement mode is Realtime 2 s to 1 hour Changing the time div at the screen that appears when one of the CH1 t
221. ingle quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example lt Character string data gt ABC IEEE488 2 1987 If a character string contains a double quotation mark use two double quotation marks to indicate it This rule also applies to a single quotation mark within a character string Response messages always use double quotation marks around the character string Since lt Character string data gt is an arbitrary character string leaving the end quotation mark or double quotation mark will cause the recorder to interpret the program message unit as part of the lt character string data gt As a result errors may not be detected properly lt Block Data gt lt Block data gt is an arbitrary 8 bit data lt Block data gt is used only in response messages It is expressed in the following form Form Example lt N digit decimal value gt lt Data byte string gt 6000010ABCDEFGHIJ Data Conitroller N Indicates that the data is lt Block data gt lt N digit decimal value gt Indicates the number of bytes of data 000010 10 bytes lt Data byte string gt Indicates the actual data ABCDEFGHIJ Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that ASCII code CR which is ODH and LF which is OAH can also be included as part of the data Be sure the controller can distinguish between the data
222. inting density will automatically be reduced if the density gets too high This sometimes causes fainter recording IM OR100E 01E 2 2 Installing the Recorder Set the recorder in a place that meets the following conditions e Placing the recorder under direct sunlight or near a heater will adversely affect the internal circuit and the case Choose a location near room temperature 23 C with minimal temperature fluctuations Relative humidity should be 35 to 80 with no condensation When the relative humidity is 35 or below protect the recorder from static electricity buildup by using a grounded discharge mat Moving the recorder from a dry cool environment to a warm ius p e O me o s humid environment or abruptly changing the room temperature may cause condensation In this case let the recorder adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before use e Maintain the left and right sides of the recorder near horizontal position The maximum permissible inclination from the front to the rear is 5 degree Angles greater than this can impede proper recording e Exposure to soot steam moisture or corrosive gases may damage or corrode the recorder e If you are using a portable phone to send the measurement data move the portable phone away from the recorder and the measurement lead by at least a meter The electromagnetic waves of the portable phone can affect the measurement
223. ion previous screen Select start end points of Select the calculation range the calculation range set with the cursor Operation Keys TRDDER 3 Displays the captured data 6 20 IM OR100E 01E 6 10 Calculating Statistics Operating Procedure 1 Displaying the calculation setting screen Press the F4 Calc key on the playback screen Calculation setting screen is displayed 2 Setting the calculation range Set whether to calculate based on all data points in the block being displayed Total or the data points in the range specified by the cursors Cursor The one with is selected Pressing the F3 key switches between the two 3 Setting the calculation range with the cursors If Cursor was selected in step 2 the calculation range is specified by the cursors Select whether to set the start point S of the calculation range or the end point E of the calculation range with the F2 key Pressing the F2 key switches between the two Set the starting point and end point with the SCROLL CURSOR key 4 Executing the calculation g Pressing the F key executes the calculation and displays the calculation 2 9 results o D Note z S 5 Q Setting Expansion calc to ON at the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed calculates and displays the RMS value and the area Integ1 Inte
224. irosis icerisine Memory Linking 00 0 0 eeecceeeseseeceeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeeeeeaee Memory mode noooit aE a E Monitor displaying N NiMH Battery Pack 0 cecececcescseeseeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 14 Normal trig gebe hiyo e n tives 1 8 O Operation Mode cscesceseeseeseseeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeaee 1 6 Operation Panel sss ceccseseuiedsagessivescccanscievaccesauatens 1 2 Operation time between charges 0 0 0 0 cee 2 16 Optional Accessories cece eeeeseecseteeeeseeeeteeseeeee 3 P parity 11 9 Passwords sist a a ss 11 18 PO Card araen atn n NNN 10 10 PC Gard Function sseecsocscenectes ga inian 1 4 PHASE sernai n a N ER EN E aii 9 7 Phasel P eenen e a wa teheeaieees 9 7 POU ERATOR TA AEE E E AE 6 8 POU SEEE RETE 11 9 Power Save Printing ssseccisicnscsiicicisiiiiriiios 2 2 Printer Head s Lathes scsessssevvsndssgas erp eantacssneaviedeossenn 2 2 Printing the List of Settings oe 12 10 R Realtime sn tanien R 7 1 Realtime moderoi a E A EEEE 1 6 Realtime mode memory mode s ssesssseessseeeeeeeeeeee 1 6 Realtime Memory Mode s sssssssesssssssssrersisrsrssrenes 8 2 Recharging s scsesiccascvveceseeseaseacsasissuscsasasseastanassssciacad record format record interval tecord length vei onenen eiia recording format ccecsssescecetceteeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 6 10 7 3 recording MOE misie a RERA 6 11 6 15 Recording the Captured Data ceeeeeeeseeeeees 6 13 reference Sisal isi
225. is incorrect Examples Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data Bit 4 EXE Execution Error Set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Examples Parameters are outside the setting range an attempt is made to make a hard copy during acquisition Bit 3 DDE Device Dependent Error Set to 1 when execution of the command is not possible due to an internal problem in the instrument that is not a command error or an execution error Example The circuit breaker is reset Bit 2 QYE Query Error Set to 1 if the output queue is empty or if the data is missing even after a query has been sent Examples No response data data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not used always 0 Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete Not used always 0 IM OR100E 01E App 67 xipueddy E Appendix 1 3 Status Response Bit Masking To mask a bit in the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB of the status byte to change set the corresponding bit in the standard event enable register to 0 For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to 0 This can be done using the ESE command To inquire whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use the ESE Operation of the Standard Ev
226. isplayed at once switching Lin Log available for RMS values only or chart format switch the display of the even and odd order Automatic Analysis Mode Section Description of operation Display the result of the analysis after measure one wavelength Function to save the result of the analysis to the PC card available Target frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz automatic estimation 45 0 Hz to 65 0 Hz Trigger Operation Free repeat single Parameters Harmonic distortion or relative harmonic content Analysis Operation After making the measurement automatically display the result of the analysis Analyzed parameters RMS value of harmonics relative harmonic content phase angle for each order of each channel and the total RMS value total harmonic distortion IEC CSA Harmonic power relative harmonic content harmonic phase angle for single phase two wire system single phase three wire system and three phase three wire system and the active power apparent power reactive power power factor Display Bar graph display all harmonics displayed at once switching Lin Log available for RMS values only or chart format switch the display of the even and odd harmonics IM OR100E 01E 14 11 suoneoyioeds z 14 8 Other Specifications External I O Interface Terminal Screw less terminal External trigger input TTL level or contact point pulse width 2 us or more External sampling clock input up to 100 kHz selectable External t
227. it it will be ignored The default value is SRE 0 all bits disabled The service request enable register is not cleared by inquiring with SRE STB Function Syntax Example Commom Group Queries the value of the status byte register STB STB 4 Description lt NRf gt is the sum of the bits expressed as TST Function Syntax Example a decimal number Since the register is read without serial polling bit 6 is MSS not RQS The status byte register is not cleared by inquiring with STB Executes a self test and queries the result TST TST 0 Description If it passes the self test 0 is returned If not a non 0 value is returned This command is equivalent to the SELFtest MEMory command IM OR100E 01E App 63 gt 3 ke 5 x Appendix 1 3 Status Response Appendix 1 3 Status Response Overview of the Status Report The figure below shows the status report which is read by a serial poll This is an extended version of the one specified in IEEE 488 2 1987
228. ither DC input or ground level Filter Set ON OFF using the F2 key NULL Take the current input value to be 0 Time axis Set the time div with the time axis TIME DIV key Scaling Linear scale to another physical value Zero adjust Adjust the ground level to zero n 5 a r gt o fo D o fa 3 5 Cana J D 5 Ko aL st 3 gt x a D 5 2 e 5 fo D wn O D gt IM OR100E 01E 4 1 4 2 Setting the Input Coupling Setting Screen to 1 DIV 2 5 004 3 5 00V 1 DIV 3 5 00U 4 5 BAY 1 DIV 4 5 00U i i lees x1 t DIU Input Filter Null Scaling De vjoOff vi off vi Comm Input orf RMS GND p Displays the setting menu Operation Keys Sets the measurement gt range a 72 79 Fs is Makes a selection Displays the monitor screen 4 2 IM OR100E 01E 4 2 Setting the Input Coupling Operating Procedure Setting the Input Coupling Selects the method to couple the input signal to the vertical control circuit Press the F1 key Select the coupling method from the following DC Captures the DC and AC components of the input signal RMS Measures the RMS value of the AC voltage This coupling method is available only on the OR300E GND Confirms the ground level TC Specified when measuring the temperature using a type K
229. jeuy d1uOWIeH 9 10 Calculating Statistics Harmonic Distortion CSA Computes the ratio of the total RMS value of the 2nd to the 40th order harmonics with respect to the total RMS value of the fundamental to the 40th order harmonics Harmonic Distortion CSA 40 RMS value of the nth order harmonic voltage or current 40 2 gt RMS value of the fundamental voltage or current n Total RMS Value Computes the total RMS value of the fundamental to the 40th order harmonics Harmonic Distortion CSA 40 RMS value of the nth order harmonic voltage or current 40 2 gt RMS value of the fundamental voltage or current n Note Since the computational result is linearly scaled in the harmonic mode the result may become negative depending on the linear scale setting Active Power Active power total RMS value of the voltage x total RMS value of current x cos Phase difference of the current with respect to the voltage Apparent Power Apparent power total RMS value of the voltage X total RMS value of current Reactive Power Reactive power total RMS value of the voltage x total RMS value of current x sing vi apparent power active power g Phase difference of the current with respect to the voltage Note If the current is ahead of the voltage a minus sign is displayed on the reactive power Power Factor Computes the ratio of the active power with respect to the a
230. l AAA Alkaline Dry Cells Part No A1070EB 6 batteries Belt Part No B9988CK 1 set Instruction manual 1 copy IM OR100E 01E 14 15 suoneoyioeds z 14 10 External Dimensions Unit mm OO OO GOO GO If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10mm the tolerance is 0 3mm 14 16 IM OR100E 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Communication Commands Appendix 1 1 Before programming Messages Messages The communication between the controller and the recorder is done in blocks of data called messages Messages sent from the controller to this recorder are called program messages and messages received by the controller from this recorder are called response messages If a program message contains a query command a command which requests a response the recorder returns a response message A single response message is always returned in response to a program message ee lt Program message unit gt lt PMT gt Program Messages As explained above program messages are sent from the controller to this recorder The format of a program message is shown below lt Program message unit gt A program message consists of zero or more program message units each unit corresponds to one command This recorder executes the commands in the order that they are received Ea
231. l signal as a trigger Start time Set whether or not to consider the specified time as satisfying the trigger condition Interval time Set whether or not to consider every specified time interval as satisfying the trigger condition Wave Window Trigger Trigger for Detecting Abnormalities in the Power Supply Signal Setting parameter Description Mode Set the trigger operation Free Capture the measurement data regardless of the trigger Single Capture the data once after the trigger Repeat Capture the data after every trigger Reference wave Set the reference signal to create the trigger region Delay Pre trigger trigger delay is set in the range from 100 to 100 where 100 is the time necessary to capture the data Frequency Set the frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz of the input signal Synchronous trigger Set the trigger condition to synchronize the reference signal and the input signal CH Synchronous trigger source channel Edge Trigger type Level Trigger level Type Set the trigger ON OFF Condition Set the width of the trigger range as a percentage of the measurement range If the reference wave is set to Ideal set the following parameters also Peak Set the width of the trigger region at the peak value in of the measurement range Offset Set the offset value as a percentage of the measurement range Phase Set the phase difference of the input signal with respect the ideal
232. lated from each other 788031 1 Overview This probe is a dedicated logic probe for connecting to the logic input connector of the OR100E OR300E Since the probe has a TTL level input contact input selector switch wide range of measurements can be made from electronic circuit to relay operation timing measurements 2 Component Names 1 Input selector switch Used to switch between the two input formats TTL level TTL and contact CONTACT 2 Connection lead alligator clip Used mainly to connect to the contact circuit There are four signal lines red and four ground lines black 3 Connection lead IC clip Used mainly to connect to the electronic circuit There are four signal lines red and two ground lines black 4 Round type connector This is for connecting to the logic input connector of the OR100E OR300E IM OR100E 01E uoneiodo a10jog 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable 788035 1 Overview This probe is a dedicated high voltage logic probe for connecting to the logic input connector of the OR100E OR300E 2 Component Names 1 Input indicator The indicator lights when a voltage of 30 VDC or more is applied to the probe 2 Connection lead alligator clip Used mainly to connect to the contact circuit There are four signal lines red and four ground lines black 3 Round type connector This is for connecting to the logic input connector of the OR100E OR300E 4 Indication of the furthest p
233. lay and recording lt x gt indicates the operation Syntax ACTion STOP 1 Start list printing Example ACTION STOP 2 Start screen copy corresponds to the COPY ACTion TDIV key Function Set queries the time axis rate of the monitor screen Syntax ACTion TDIV SEC2 SECS5 SEC30 MIN1 MIN2 MIN5 MIN1O0 MIN30 HOUR1 ACTion TDIV Example ACTION TDIV SEC2 ACTION TDIV ACTION TDIV SEC2 Example ACTION PRINT1 App 16 IM OR100E 01E BLOCk Group CHANnel Group BLOCk Group The BLOCK command is used to set or query block parameters BLOCk BLOCk BLOCk CURRent Function Queries all the memory block settings Function Sets queries the current block number Syntax BLOCk Syntax LOCk CURRent lt NRf gt LOCk CURRent B Example BLOCK gt BLOCK CURRENT 1 B lt NR gt BLOCK No 1 to 32 B B BLOCk ACTual g Example LOCK CUREENT 3 Function Queries the number of blocks already LOCK CURRENT BLOCK sampled CURRENT 3 Syntax BLOCk ACTual Example BLOCK ACTUAL gt 12 Description Cannot query during memory measurement Description Cannot set or query during memory measurement 0 is returned if there are no samples CHANnel Group The commands in the CHANnel group are used to set or query CHANnel parameters These commands correspond to CH1 to CH4 keys Fite f lt Space gt LOWScale lt Space gt
234. lect whether or not to record comments or measurement range information Channel record Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Line Set the thickness of the line used to record the analog waveform Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the record position of the logic channel However it cannot be recorded when using X Y format Style Set only when using X Y format Set the line style to record Channel selection Set only when using X Y format Set the Y axis to channel 2 3 or 4 IM OR100E 01E 6 1 D mr D oO D r 3 Q 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data Setting screen pen a o a ample rate calculate 1 Mode KES wise Sample rate c a Format Azone Length ao bene Measurement time scale Mag ock ie c Number of blocks Trigger kind Wave Window Trigger calculated fromthe memory length 4L Memory clear SOF 5 Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off 6 Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Logic 1234 Length Continue CH A Gauge print On CH B 0 BBA Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Memory Realtime Rea 1 Men Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays th
235. ll GHz SQHzZ Wi Execute VARIABLE ESC U down p T 4 Makes a selection 3 Moves the waveform up 3 Moves the waveform down Displays the zoom factor setting screen 4 6 IM OR100E 01E 4 4 Setting the Filter NULL Position and Zoom Factor Operating Procedure 1 Setting the Filter The filter cannot be specified for the following cases When the input type is set to TC or RMS OR300E When the OR300E is in the harmonic mode Press the F2 Filter key A screen is displayed for selecting the filter Select the filter by pressing F1 Off key F2 5 Hz key or F3 500 Hz key If you set the input to RMS on the OR300E or harmonic mode you cannot set the filter The 5 Hz low pass filter is always activated for thermocouples 2 Setting NULL only when necessary If the input type is set to TC you cannot specify NULL Press the F3 Null key A screen is displayed for setting NULL To assign the current input value to 0 press the F2 Execute key Pressing F1 Off will cancel the setting This is valid when the difference between the input value and 0 is less than or equal to 10 of the measurement range When NULL is executed the difference between the current input value and Q is added to or subtracted from the input signal The result is considered to be the measurement data Volta
236. ll busy after 4 redials then the data is recorded with the built in printer If the FAX modem could not be recognized by the recorder such as when the FAX modem is not connected the data is recorded with the built in printer If the destination FAX is using a cut paper then the data is divided into several pages if it exceeds one page If the destination FAX is using continuous paper then the data is recorded continuously During the communication the following messages are displayed Dialing Connecting line Sending Sending FAX Sending complete Sending complete IM OR100E 01E 11 15 Cc o 5 O e 3 3 2 9 o 5 H c 5 2 o 5 D 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem Automatically Sending the Data after Capturing One Block of Data Setting Screen Operation Keys mMenu Mode Memory 4 kS s Format Azone Length gt 1 div ares T scale Mag x1 32block Trigger kind Normal Memory clear Off Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card Set to FAX Print mode Wave Logic 1234 Length Continue CH A Gauge print On CH B 0 BBA Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin Off Save Fax r Aee A PRINT me
237. ll the internal memory Operation after data capturing Set the operation after capturing the data once Setting the display format Setting parameters Description Format Select 1 zone 2 zone 4 zone or XY T axis zoom Set the T axis zoom factor for the display screen Accumulate display Select whether or not to accumulate the waveform Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the display position of the logic channel However it cannot be displayed when using X Y format Channel selection Set only when using X Y format Set the Y axis to channel 2 3 or 4 Setting the recording format Setting parameters Description Format Record mode Select 1 zone 2 zones 4 zones or XY Select whether to record the analog waveform or the digital values This parameter is invalid when using X Y format Record length Select whether to record the captured data with the same zoom factor as the display zoom factor or expand reduce to A4 or AS size to record This parameter is invalid when recording digital values or when using X Y format Interval time Gauge record Set only when recording digital values Sets the recording interval Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording Grid Select the grid type Time record Set whether or not to record the time record of the captured data Channel message Se
238. lt App 63 IM OR100E 01E App 15 gt 3 3 5 x ACTion Group ACTion Group The commands in the ACTion group are used to adjust the zero position execute auto range start playback recording start and stop measurement display recording and set the LCD back lighting ON OFF It is also used to make inquires about them Ss e AUTorange A LCDLight ACTion ADJust ACTion STARt lt X gt Function Executes zero adjust Function Starts a memory operation such as Syntax ACTion ADJust measurement display and recording Syntax ACTion STARt lt X gt Example ACTION ADJUST lt x gt indicates the operation 1 Start measurement ACTion AUTorange corresponds to the START Function Executes auto range key 2 Start PLAYBACK corresponds Syntax ACTion AUTorange to the PLAYBACK key Example ACTION AUTORANGE 3 Start recording corresponds A to PRINT key ACTion LCDLight 4 Start manual trigger Function Controls LCD back lighting corresponds to Turn the LCD back lighting ON UADTRICGER Key 5 Start analog waveform Syntax ACTion LCDLight lt Boolean gt monitor Example ACTION LCDLIGHT ON 6 Start digital value monitor Example ACTION START1 ACTion PRINt lt X gt Function Starts printer related operation ACTion STOP Syntax ACTion PRINt lt X gt Function Stops Aborts operations such as sampling ee A disp
239. ltage range 0 5 to 5 5V IM OR100E 01E 12 13 SUOI IUNY sno ueLeueL ljl ISIN RI 12 10 Locking the Keys Setting screen SYSTEM Copy action BMP file RMS Statis calc On Initialize To Next page ee ee a b Display language English Tag Off Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Inval id Key lock Display grid On Wh trg level change off Start time 8 End time 8 Change level CH1 CH2 0 CH3 CHA 0 Esc _______ Go back to the Self test previous screen Por panera 12 14 IM OR100E 01E 12 10 Locking the Keys Operating Procedure 1 Enabling Disabling key lock On the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed highlight Next Page and press the F1 OK key The next page is displayed Select Key lock with the F2 Start Key or F3 All Key Start Key Enables the lock on only the START key All Key Enables the lock all panel keys except for BACK LIGHT key 2 Locking the key Pressing the BACK LIGHT key for three seconds locks the keys To unlock the keys press the BACK LIGHT key for three seconds again IM OR100E 01E 12 15 SUOI IUNY SNOSUBUP 9ISI N RI 12 11 Turning ON OFF the Grid Setting Screen MONITOR Se Sa ss Ee E i gt 1U DIUI a UDE 1DU W Wou IUD E 1U 10D Zero cal List G
240. lts of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt CONTent lt X1 gt 1 to 4 Channel lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Harmonic order Example STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 ORDER3 CONTENT 3 33 Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIS HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt PHASe Function Queries the phase of each harmonic order of each analog channel from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt PHASe lt X1 gt 1 to 4 Channel lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Harmonic order Example STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 ORDER3 PHASE gt 3 5deg Description If calculation is not performed of is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS Function Queries the RMS value of each harmonic order of each analog channel from the results of the harmonic analysis Syntax STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X1 gt ORDer lt X2 gt RMS lt X1 gt 1 to 4 Channel lt X2 gt 1 to 40 Harmonic order Example STATIS HARMONIC CHANNEL1 ORDER3 RMS 3 33V Description If calculation is not performed of f is returned If calculation is abnormal is returned STATIs HARMonic CHANnel lt X gt THD1 Function Queries the harmon
241. lysis App 59 Sets queries the trigger mode for automatic analysis IGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt CHANnel Sets queries the trigger channel for the automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt LEVel Sets queries the trigger level for the automatic analysis App 59 App 59 App 59 App 14 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt ORDer Sets queries the harmonic order used in triggering during the App 59 automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic KIND Sets queries the kind of trigger for the automatic analysis App 59 TRIGger HARMonic SYNChronize CHANnel Sets queries the synchronous trigger channel for the automatic App 60 analysis TRIGger HRAMonic SYNChronize LEVel Set queries the synchronize trigger level for the automatic analysis App 60 TRIGger LOA LOB Queries all setting values relating to the specified logic CH for the App 60 normal trigger TRIGger LOA LOB PATTern lt x gt Sets Queries the logic trigger bit pattern of the specified logic CH App 60 for the normal trigger TRIGger LOA LOB TYPE Sets Queries the trigger type of the specified logic CH for the App 60 normal trigger TRIGger LOGic Queries all setting values relating to the logic input for the normal App 60 trigger TRIGger LOGic FCOunt Sets Queries the trigger filter amount of the logic CH for the normal App 60 trigger TRI
242. m ETime SYSTem GRID SYSTem HEADer SYSTem LANGuage SYSTem MTKey SYSTem RMSStatis SYSTem STTime SYSTem TAG SYSTem TLINe SYSTem TNUM2 SYSTem TNUMber SYSTem WIWC TRIGger Group TRIGger TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt Gger Gger Gger Gger 2 Wek es hoe a T Gger Gger COMBination Gger DELay ign ce et oe cpt rp E Gger EXTernal IGger FREQuency IGger INTerval IGger HARMonic IGger HARMonic MODE J J o dow TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt FCOunt TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt FILTer TRIGger CHANnel lt x gt LEVel lt x gt HANnel lt x gt OFFSet HANnel lt x gt PEAK ANnel lt x gt PHASe HANnel lt x gt TOLerance HANnel lt x gt TYPE Sets queries the allowed with of the wave window trigger foreach App 52 channel Sets Queries all the settings relating to date and time Sets Queries the date Sets Queries the time App 52 App 52 App 52 Sets queries the time at which the width of the wave window trigger App 52 is reset to the original value Sets queries whether or not to display the grid Sets Queries the header to the FAX message Sets Queries the display language Sets Queries the manual trigger key App 52 App 52 App 52 App 53 Sets Queries whether or not to calculate the eapansion calculation App 53 Sets queries the time at which the width of the wave window trigger App 53 is changed Sets Queries whether or not to u
243. magnification x1 5 2 50 Example CHANNEL1 POSITION 10 4 Example CHANNEL1 MAGNI 1 2 CHANNEL1 POSITION CHANNEL1 CHANNEL1 MAGNI CHANNEL1 POSITION 10 4 MAGNI 1 2 Description 1 2 and 5 can be set on OR300E CHANnel lt X gt RANGe CHANnel lt X gt NULL Function Sets queries the measurement range for the specified channel Function Sets queries the NULL for the specified Syntax CHANne1 lt X gt RANGe lt Voltage gt channel Syntax CHANnel lt X gt NULL lt Boolean gt Armi ONS lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt RANGe CHANnel1 lt X gt NULL lt voltage gt measurement Example CHANNEL1 NULL ON range 1000 V 500 V 200 V CHANNEL1 NULL gt CHANNEL1 100 V 50 V 20 V 10 V 5 V NULL 1 2 V 1 V 500 MV 200 MV Description If you set the input to RMS on OR300E 100 MV you cannot set NULL Example CHANNEL1 RANGE 20V CHANNEL RANGE CHANNEL1 RANGE 2 000E 00 Discription Since the measurment range is set in terms of V FS V full scale or mV FS it is 10 times V DIV or mV FS gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 19 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt X gt SCALing Function Syntax Example Queries all setting values relating to scaling for the specified channel CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL1 SCAILNG CHANNEL1 SCALING MODE 0 POS1 SCALE 5 0000E 0 VOLT 5 0000E 0 CHANNEL1 SCALING POS2 SCA
244. mat IM OR100E 01E 10 19 eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g Chapter 11 Using Communication Functions 11 1 RS 232 Interface Specifications Receiving Function All of the parameters you set with the panel keys can be set through the RS232 interface except for the following Turning the recorder ON OFF Setting the communication parameters Performing operations dealing with the scrolling of the waveform or the cursor Sending Function You can output setup data measurement data status data error code RS 232 Interface Specifications Electrical mechanical characteristics Conforms to EIA RS 232 C Connection Communication Synchronization Baud rate Start bit Data length Parity Stop bit Connector Hardware handshaking Software handshaking Receive buffer size Point to point Full duplex Start stop synchronization 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps 1 bit fixed 7 or 8 bits Even odd none 1 or 2 bits DEL J9PAF 13L6 JAE or equivalent Flow control using CA and CB signals Flow control using XON and XOFF signals 256 bytes IM OR100E 01E suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Buisn ey 11 2 Connecting the RS 232 Interface Cable When connecting this recorder to a computer make sure the handshaking methods data transmission rates and data formats match on both sides For details see the following pages Also make sure to use interface cables that match the specifi
245. me Rea 1 Men Harmonic Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Operation Keys PRINT Moves between setting parameters HHODE Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation mode Set the operation mode to Memory with the F1 Memory key 2 Setting the memory length Press the Next key twice and the F3 PC card key to set the memory length to PC card 3 For other settings see section 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data IM OR100E 01E 10 10 10 4 Writing Data Simultaneously to the Flash ATA Memory Card CAUTION Never remove the flash ATA memory card while data are being saved to it This can destroy the data on the memory card or damage the card or the OR Even when data capturing is stopped with the STOP key it may take 10 to 100 seconds before the operation actually stops Do not remove the flash ATA memory card during this time period Simultaneous Writing Operation When data capture is started data in the internal memory is automatically saved to the flash ATA memory card while continuing the capturing process to the internal memory The measurement data that are captured up to the point when the operation is stopped are saved as a single file to the flash ATA memory card The file name is MDxxx dat where xxx is a sequence number starting with 000 that i
246. min 5 min div 2 mm min 10 min div 1 mm min 30 min div 20 mm hour 1 hour div 10 mm hour IM OR100E 01E 7 7 Bulpiosey wnje y x 7 5 Starting Stopping Zone Recording Measurement start time Gage 5 a wi ii Channel number 3 g CHa aw gt Full scale Measurement time X Y Recording Measurement start time Measurement start time Start Sep 0 97 3 45 44 End Sep 3 97 63 45 47 sa Channel number 3 7 2 58 Y axis gage 1 25 0 1 2 2 50 3 5 aa So 80 we N Saole test Comment X axis gage Channel information IM OR100E 01E 7 8 7 5 Starting Stopping Digital Value Recording This function records the measured value of each channel as numerical values in the specified interval Recording date Hoe CH3 CH4 Channel number y k l V N Units D ooo PITA O oO EES pK li F b b gt F Measured value co aT Cy ii J O fs oD 1 Mm Pom Poh tf J os OD Recording time 7 Bulpioseay wnje y IM OR100E 01E 7 9 7 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data Since the measurement data is captured and held in the internal memory Setting Screen PLAY BACK Operation Keys temporarily even in the realtime recording mode you can display record the captured data Mar 04 93 16 21 ESIS la ah
247. n ON and the results of the area calculation Setting Screen Operation Keys time when you have the expansion calc set to ON r Communication Port RS232 Baud rate 9680 Parity None Handshaking Off Off Stop bit mI Data length 8 Set m Date amp Time Date 977 9 2 Time 23 49 35 Set m General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc Next page Initialize Lor oom Operating procedure Set the Expansion calc to ON at the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed The RMS value can also be calculated and displayed when executing the calculation as described in 6 10 Calculating Statistics Calculation takes more Sets ON OFF Moves between setting parameters Displays the setting menu Executing the calculation displays the RMS value with the other calculated results 6 24 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 7 Realtime Displaying Recording 7 1 Setting Parameters This chapter describes the methods to display or record the measurement data The relevant parameters are listed below You will set these parameters using the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Recording format of the analog waveform Setting parameters Description Operation mode Select whether to save the measurement data to memory or realtime record with the built in printer Select Real
248. ndency to fade Using Chart Paper Only use chart paper provided by YOKOGAWA Using other charts may cause paper jam Use dry hands when touching the chart Perspiration from the hand can cause smudging Do not rub the surface with hard objects Heat generated from friction may cause discoloration Avoid contact with chemicals oils and other substances It may cause discoloration and fading 2 22 IM OR100E 01E 2 6 Setting the Date and Time Setting Screen SYSTEM m Communication Port gt RS232 Baud rate 9600 Parity gt None Handshaking Off Off Stop bit 1 Data length 8 Set m Date amp Time Date Be 9 2 Time 20 31 5 1 Set 2 m General Copy action BMP file Expansion calc Off Next page Initialize 18 1 18 Operation Key Display the setting screen Making selections Move between setting parameters Operating Procedure 1 Setting the date and time Use the F1 to F4 keys to set the data and time Date is specified in year month day order and the time is specified in hour minute second order 2 Confirming the setting If you highlight Set Confirm and Cancel will be displayed on the F1 and F2 keys respectively Confirm the setting by pressing F1 IM OR100E 01E 2 23 uoneiodo a10jog D Chapter 3 First time Users 3 1 Setting Proce
249. ng MENU MSTOp STOPkey MEMFul1 MENU MSTOp MENU MSTOP STOPKEY MENU MSTOP MENU MSTOP STOPKEY MENU MTDiv valid only when the mode is memory or real amp memory Function Syntax Example Sets queries the time axis rate during the data capture MENU MTDiv lt character data gt lt NRE gt MENU MTDiv When the format is T Y lt Character data gt USEC200 USEC500 MSEC1 MSEC2 MSECS5 MSEC10 MSEC20 MSEC50 MSEC100 MSEC200 MSEC500 SEC1 SEC2 SECS5 SEC10 SEC30 MIN1 MIN2 EXTernal When the format is X Y lt NR gt 400000 to 0 667 The unit is S s lt Character data gt EXTernal MENU MTDIV USEC200 MENU MTDIV MENU MTDIV USEC200 MENU MTDIV 400000 MENU MTDIV MENU MTDIV 400000 App 38 IM OR100E 01E MENU Group MENU PLAYback valid only when the MENU RLENgth valid only when the mode mode is realtime and the simultaneous recording is realtime and the format is T Y is numerical values and the format is T Y Function Sets queries the length of the realtime Function Sets queries the digital recording interval recording during playback Syntax MENU RLENgth CONTinue Syntax MENU PLAYback lt NRf gt lt NRE gt MENU PLAYback MENU RLENgth lt NR gt 1 10 100 lt NR gt Memory length 20 200 Example MENU PLAYBACK 1 800 MENU PLAYBACK gt MENU Example MENU RLENGTH CONTINUE PLAYBACK 1 MENU
250. ng data lt 8 digit decimal number gt Indicates the number of bytes of data lt data byte string gt Indicates the measured value The WORD size measurement values are listed for each data No lt CRC gt 2 byte CRC value CRC is a way to check the data by considering all the data to be an array of bit values and determining the remainder by dividing with a specific value CRC CCITT CRC ITU T It is calculated by using the divisor Ox11021 X16 X 4 X5 1 DATA END Function Sets queries which point of the specified waveform is to be the last data Syntax DATA END lt NR gt DATA END lt NR gt Data number 0 to 127999 128kW CHModel 0 to 511999 Example DATA END 100 DATA END DATA END 100 App 24 IM OR100E 01E DATA Group DATA FORMat WORD format Function Sets queries the format of the data to send The output format is 8 lt 8 digit decimal Syntax DATA FORMat ASCii WORD number gt lt data byte string gt lt CRC gt lt crIf gt DATA FORMat 8 Example DATA FORMAT ASCII Indicates that it is lt block data gt The DATA FORMAT gt DATA number indicates the number of digits in FORMAT ASCII the byte number field of the following DATA INTerval sh i f lt 8 digit decimal number gt Function Queries the time between the data in units A Indicates the number of bytes of data of seconds of the specified waveform Syntax DATA INTerval Example DATA INTERVAL
251. ng tags and comments At the screen that appears when the channel key CH1 to CH4 is pressed press the F4 scaling amp comm key to display the screen for setting the tags and comments Set the tags and comments individually Move the input position with the Selection key and select the character with the SCROLL CURSOR key Set the tag with seven characters or less and the comment with 20 characters or less IM OR100E 01E 12 9 SUOIIUNY SNOSUBUP 99SI RI 12 7 Printing the List of Settings You can record the list of the current settings with the built in printer Setting Screen MONITOR 7 w oue of E iwDuid offo l Freeze auto Rng Bright til 1U DIU 1U DIV a 1U DIU 1H 1U DIV Zero cal List Grid Operating Procedure Printing the list of settings At the screen that appears when the MONITOR key is pressed press the NEXT key A screen for executing the list print appears Pressing the F2 List key records the list of settings with the built in printer Note Setting parameters on the screen that appears when the FILE key is pressed is not recorded You cannot abort a list print You cannot list print under the following conditions While capturing measurement data While waiting for a trigger While the built in printer is operating While accessing the flash ATA card or the FAX modem 12 10 IM OR100E 01E
252. nnel DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing COEFficient Queries the scaling coefficient of the specified analog channel App 24 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing MODE Queries the ON OFF condition of the scaling of the specified App 24 analog channel DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing OFFSet Queries the scaling offset value of the specified analog channel App 24 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SCALing UNIT Queries the scaling unit of the specified analog ch App 24 DATA CHANnel lt X gt SEND Sends the data of the specified analog channel App 24 DATA END Sets queries which point of the specified waveform is to be the last data App 24 DATA FORMat Sets queries the format of the data to send App 25 DATA INTerval Queries the time between the data in units of seconds of the App 25 specified waveform DATA LENGth Queries the total number of data points of the specified waveform App 25 DATA LOA LOB INPut Queries the ON OFF condition of each bit of the specified logic App 25 FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE FILE DATA DATA DATA DATA TTIMe LOA LOB SEND STARt TRIGger FILE Group LOAD PANel SAVE SAVE ALL SAVE ASCii SAVE BINary SAVE CHANnel lt X gt SAVE COMMent SAVE END SAVE OPTion SAVE PANel SAVE STARt INITialize Group INIT INIT MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU
253. nu C Displays the setting menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters Displays the captured data 11 16 IM OR100E 01E 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem Operating Procedure 1 Setting the operation after data capturing At the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed set the PC card parameter under the operation after memory to FAX Pressing the START key will capture the data under the specified measurement conditions and after capturing one block of data the recorder automatically sends the data to the FAX Note The recording format is the same as the recording format used to record with the built in printer If the destination is busy it will redial after about 90 seconds If it is still busy after 4 redials then the data is recorded with the built in printer If the FAX modem could not be recognized such as when the FAX modem is not connected the data is recorded with the built in printer If the destination FAX is using a cut paper then the data is divided into several pages if it exceeds one page If the destination FAX is using continuous paper then the data is recorded continuously During the communication the following messages are displayed Dialing Connecting line Sending Sending FAX Sending complete Sending complete em o 5 O
254. o CH4 keys is pressed does not change the waveform that is displayed on the screen The waveform displayed on the screen changes depending on the display update rate which is located at the screen that appears when the MONITOR key is pressed External is set when using an external sampling clock When using wave window trigger select the time axis from 1 ms div 2 ms div 5 ms div or 10 ms div Relationship between Time Div and Sample Rate In the Memory mode or the Realtime Memory mode the recorder captures 80 measurement data per 1 div By setting the time div the sample rate the number times the data is captured in 1 s is automatically determined Sample rate 80 time div The unit of time div is seconds n g 5 a a gt o fo D o 3 3 mr J D 5 re Ko aL zn 3 gt x D 5 2 e 5 fo D wn O D gt a Relationship between Time Div and Chart Speed In the Realtime recording mode data is recorded by considering 1 div to be 10mm The following table shows the relationship time div Chart speed 2 s div 5 mm s 5 s div 2 mm s 10 s div 1 mm s 30 s div 20 mm min 1 min div 10 mm min 2 min div 5 mm min 5 min div 2 mm min 10 min div 1 mm min 30 min div 20 mm hour 1 hour div 10 mm hour IM OR100E 01E 4 9 4 6 Setting the Linear Scaling Setting Screen CH1 1V DIV CH 1 Pit t DIU
255. oint that should be touched Never touch closer to the connection point beyond the indicated line while the signal is being input to the probe Procedure on Use 1 Attach the accessory connection lead IC clip or alligator clip to the logic probe 2 When using the 788031 set the input selector switch For a TTL level input threshold input voltage is about 1 4 V any voltage higher than this sets the logic to 1 For a contact input shorting signal lines and ground lines sets the logic to 1 3 Turn OFF the power switch 4 Connect the round type connector to the logic input connector of the OR100E OR300E 5 Turn ON the power switch 6 Connect individual lead clips to the measurement points IM OR100E 01E 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable Specifications 788031 when connected to the OR100E OR300E Input type Common ground within the same probe Floating between recorder and probe Number of inputs 4 Allowable input range 35 VDC Input impedance 10 kQ or more Threshold level About 1 4 V Input method TTL level or contact input switching type Withstand voltage Between logic probe and case 500 VDC for one minute Insulation resistance Between logic probe and case 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC Maximum floating voltage 30 Vrms AC or 60 VDC e Applying a floating voltage above 30 Vrms or 60 VDC may cause electric shock Never apply voltage above 30 Vrms or 60 VDC e The cover sh
256. ommands for the modem developed by Hayes Corporation 7 Confirming the setting Highlighting Set and pressing the F1 Yes key confirms the setting Pressing the F2 No key cancels the setting 11 13 suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Buisn ey 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem There are two ways to send the measurement data over the FAX modem Specify the block and the range on the screen displaying the captured data and send Automatically send the data after capturing one block of data Specifying the Block and the Range and Sending Setting Screen PLAY Trigger position BACK 2 anf Lisiitiiviitiiiitiiiitiiiitiiiitiiiitiiind 0 0 9 132 975ms ex1 eams div Block 32732 rine arse JBiooe tare 10 4 Prt area OTotal E eor E Go back to Sets the record range the first screen Out to Printer ESC 7E OFAX Exec Go back to Sets the destination Execute recording the first screen Operation Keys i Makes a selection a F2 ra ee M r Displays the next set of selections Displays the captured data 11 14 IM OR100E 01E 11 8 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem Operating Procedure Set the block and the range before sending the FAX See 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform or 6 7 Recording the Captured Data as Digit
257. ons on the function of each IM OR100E 01E 1 1 Names of the Parts and Their Functions m Copy key Scrol Cursor key Output the data displayed Moves the cursor or on the screen to the built gt Range key scrolls the display in printer FAX Valid on the waveform Also used modem memory card measurement range to select input i setting screen characters p Print key specified by the Print the captured data in channel key Sets the Select key the memory measurement range Selects the setting Feed Position key se ae move alon i enaA chart Valid on the when inputting g Channel key measurement range numbers or characters Displays the screen for setting screen setting the range time specified by the NEXT key axis filter linear scaling channel key Changes Displays the next On the display of captured the waveform display selectable item to be data this key displays the displayed on the menu for turning ON OFF Setting keys screen Valid when the waveform display and Sets the items is displayed on scaling the waveform in the allocated to the keys the right of the voltage axis direction selectable items Stop Variable key Time axis key i T ai Valid on the Sets the time axis memory or stops recording to measurement range Time div on the the builtin printer setting screen mea
258. ote You cannot change any other settings If the print output or fax transmission of the operation after the data capture is set to ON in the previous section the realtime recording is aborted and the captured data is recorded or sent over the FAX modem every time a block of measurement data is saved When the recording or the FAX transmission is complete the recorder resumes the realtime recording If the PC card of the operation after the data capture is set to Data save in the previous section the measurement data is saved to the flash ATA memory card every time a block of measurement data is saved Realtime recording is not aborted while it is saving the measurement data to the memory card but the display screen is not updated during this time 2 Stopping the measurement Pressing the STOP key stops the measurement About the chart speed Chart speed is the time div set in 4 3 Setting the Time Axis Since 1 div 10 mm converting to speed gives Chart speed 10 time div The unit of time div is seconds The following table shows the relationship between time div and chart speed time div Chart speed 2 s div 5 mm s 5 s div 2 mm s 10 s div 1 mm s 30 s div 20 mm min 1 min div 10 mm min 2 min div 5 mm min 5 min div 2 mm min 10 min div 1 mm min 30 min div 20 mm hour 1 hour div 10 mm hour About sample rate The sample rate of the realtime memory mode is determined
259. ould be removed by qualified personnel only CAUTION e Check the selector switch before connecting e The four input lines on a probe are common ground Do not apply different common voltages to them as it may damage the logic probe or the connected equipment Turn OFF the OR100E OR300E when connecting or disconnecting the round type connector from the logic input connector e Never modify extend for example the connection leads e Do not exceed the allowable input range 35 V including the common voltage It may damage the logic probe or the OR100E OR300E Note If the logic probe is not connected to the OR100E OR300E the waveform becomes 1 High IM OR100E 01E uoneiodo a10jog D 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable Specifications 788035 when connected to the OR100E OR300E Input type Floating between recorder and probe Isolated channels Number of inputs 4 Allowable input range 250 Vrms Input impedance 100 KQ or more Detection level 60 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 30 to 250 VDC Undetected level 0 to 10 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 to 10 VDC Response time Rise 1 ms or less 100 VDC 200 VDC Fall 3 ms or less 100 VDC 200 VDC Withstand voltage Between logic probe and case 1 5 kVDC for one minute Between each channel 1 5 kVAC for one minute Insulation resistance Between logic probe and case 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC Maximum floating voltage 250 Vrms e Make sure that the meas
260. over of this manual ja Ie he To go back to the selection screen for the self test press the FEED key twice 13 12 IM OR100E 01E 13 3 Testing the Recorder Testing the memory CAUTION If an Aqd memory Acquisition memory error occurs all measurement data will be deleted You should therefore save necessary data to a Flash ATA memory card or other media before performing the selftest This test checks the memory function Pressing the F3 key at step 2 will display the results of the memory test with a OK or NG If NG is displayed the memory may be malfunctioning ROM OK RAM OK Aqd memory OK Testing the printer This test checks the printer Pressing the F4 key at step 2 will record test patterns with the built in printer If white lines do not appear the printer is okay If it does clean the printer head as described in 13 4 Cleaning the Printer Head If white lines still appear after cleaning it may be malfunctioning IM OR100E 01E Hunooys jqnolL Buns pue aoueuajuley 13 4 Cleaning the Printer Head The printer head will become dirty after long use If the printouts are unclear and difficult to read clean the printer head as described below 1 Cut a section of the chart paper 20 to 30 cm and apply
261. ower Measurement eesesseeeeserstseersrsrsrssrsserisisterererererersee 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data s ssssseesssssesseisisiststseersrersesrererseseees 9 4 Setting the Display F fma tzesasishieein e ia e iaa 9 9 Analyzing by Specifying the Range ww 9 10 Analyzing Automatically isn esnean a e a ta 9 14 Saving the Results of the Analysis ssessssssessssssssssesesesssrststsesestsrsereneeeseseeerererresee 9 17 Recording the Results of the Analysis sssssssssessseseeersrssststsretseerserrsrrssesrnrsisrsrerre 9 18 Other Functions nsession 9 19 Computing Equations for Harmonic Analysis 0 ccceesseesseeeeeseeeeseeseeetseeeeeeaees 9 20 Using External Media external Media senssa Na AR BARE ANGE ane Basen en ei ete Setting Parameters x Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card sesssseseesessessseesereseseseeeee 10 4 Writing Data Simultaneously to the Flash ATA Memory Card 0 0 eee 10 10 Loading the Measurement Data 0 cceceeceeceeseeseeseeseeseesecsecseceeeeceaeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeenee Displaying the Loaded Measurement Data Loading the Setup Dataiiindten nest avenidh ncn tisuveiectintieataeeet Deleting Filesi haien n itera ied ero E E Hie Ge IM OR100E 01E Contents Chapter 11 Using Communication Functions 11 1 RS 232 Interface Specifications 0 0 cece eee eseeeeeeeseeeseeecseeaeeeeseearseesesetsceeeaeees 11 1 11 2 Connecting the RS 232 Interface Ca
262. page 7 E Display language English Tag Off Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Invalid Key lock Off Display grid On WW trg level change Start time 8 End time 0p Change level CH1 CH2 0x CH3 CHA 0 ESC Self test Go back to the previous screen Port on fd 12 18 IM OR100E 01E 12 12 Temporarily Changing the Width of the Wave Window Trigger Operating Procedure At the screen that is displayed when the System key is pressed highlight Next and press the F1 OK key The next page is displayed Turn ON OFF the WW trg level change with the F1 Off or F2 On key Set the time during which the width of the wave window trigger is to be changed in the Start time box Set the time at which the width of the wave window trigger is to be changed Set the hour in the range from 00 to 23 and the minute in the range from 00 to 59 Set the time at which the width of the wave window trigger is to be changed back in the End time box Set the width of the wave window trigger Set the width of the wave window trigger for each channel with the Change level box Note When the width changes the measurement is temporarily suspended The time period during which the measurement is suspended is normally 10 s It is approximately 30 s during realtime memory mode Recording to the chart paper is also su
263. pears when one of the CH1 to CH4 keys is pressed IM OR100E 01E 4 13 Bues 1e u17 pue sixy owl 19 14 obuey juowssnsesyy y Buas al Chapter 5 Triggering 5 1 Setting Parameters This chapter describes the methods to set the trigger The relevant parameters are listed below You will set these parameters using the screen that appears when the TRIGGER key is pressed The setting parameters for the normal trigger and the wave window trigger trigger for detecting abnormalities in the power supply signal are different Select normal trigger or wave window trigger before setting the trigger parameters You can select between the normal trigger and the wave window trigger at the screen that appears when the MENU key is pressed Normal Trigger Setting parameter Description Mode Set the trigger operation Free Ignore triggers Single Capture the data once after the trigger Repeat Capture the data after every trigger Delay Pre trigger trigger delay is set in the range from 100 to 100 where 100 is the time necessary to capture the data AND OR Set whether to trigger on the AND or OR of the trigger conditions a Type Set the trigger type 2 Level Set the trigger level as a percentage of the measurement range a Filter Set the condition for detecting triggers Logic trigger Set the trigger for the logic input External trigger Set whether or not to use the externa
264. pled App 17 BLOCk CURRent Sets queries the current block number App 17 CHANnel Group CHANne1 lt X gt Queries the settings for the specified channel App 18 CHANne1 lt X gt COMMent Sets queries the annotation message for the specified channel App 18 CHANne1 lt X gt FILTer Sets queries the filter for the specified channel App 18 CHANne1 lt X gt INPut Sets queries the input to the specified analog channel App 18 CHANne1 lt X gt LOWScale Sets queries the lower limit scale for temperature measurements App 19 CHANne1 lt X gt MAGNi Sets queries the Y axis zoom factor for the specified channel App 19 CHANne1 lt X gt NULL Sets queries the NULL for the specified channel App 19 CHANne1 lt X gt POSition Sets queries the zero point for the specified channel App 19 CHANne1 lt X gt RANGe Sets queries the measurement range for the specified channel App 19 CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing Queries all setting values relating to scaling App 20 CHANne1 lt X gt SCALing MODE Sets queries the ON OFF condition of the scaling for the App 20 specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt Queries all setting values relating to POS1 and POS2 for the App 20 specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt SCALe Sets queries the scaling value of POS1 and POS2 for the App 20 specified channel CHANne1 lt X1 gt SCALing POS lt X2 gt VOLT Sets queries the measured value of scaling POS1 and POS2 for App 20 the speci
265. pparent power Power factor active power apparent power 9 22 IM OR100E 01E Chapter 10 Using External Media 10 1 External Media External Media that can be Used with the OR100E OR300E External media described in this chapter indicate external memory devices that can connect to the OR100E The external medium that can be used with the OR100E OR300E is as follows Flash ATA card Functions of the Flash ATA Card Save measurement data in binary format Save measurement data in ASCII format Load measurement data saved in binary format Save Load setup data such as the measurement range Save screen data in BMP format See 12 2 Taking Hard Copies Formatting the flash ATA card The recorder can use flash ATA cards that are formatted to MS DOS The recorder cannot format the flash ATA card Use a personal computer to format the card Useable flash ATA memory cards e SanDisk Corporation SDP3B e EPSON FLASH PACKER Series FLASH PACKER 2 FLASH PACKER 6 FLASH PACKER 10 FLASH PACKER 20 FLASH PACKER 40 e J O DATA DEVICEE PCFCA Series PCFCA 10MS PCFCA 20MS PCFCA 40MS ATA Card 110 MB or less e FUJISOKU Corporation FUJISOKU Card 160 MB or less eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g IM OR100E 01E 10 1 10 1 External Media Inserting the Flash ATA Card While the recorder is turned ON insert the Flash ATA card into the PC card slot with the top surface facing up A message PC card detected is displayed a
266. predefined region Trigger occurs when the trigger source signal enters the predefined region You can select the following conditions on each bit ignore x changes from 0 to 1 A changes from 1 to 0 J is 1 1 and is 0 0 IM OR100E 01E 1 4 Trigger Function Wave Window Trigger This is used to observe the 50 Hz 60 Hz power supply signal A wave window is created based on the ideal power supply signal sine wave or an actual power source signal create a region by adding width on the reference signal Trigger 2 occurs if the trigger source signal moves out of the wave window 2 Reference signal for the trigger region Trigger source signal Wave window The width and the phase of the wave window can be specified for each channel Synchronous Triggering This instrument observes wave window trigger in units of one cycle By doing this repetitively you can set triggers on consecutive signals The trigger used to start the one cycle trigger is called the synchronous trigger and the source channel used to set off the synchronous trigger is called the synchronous trigger source channel You select the synchronous trigger source channel from one of the measurement channels When the measurement data of the synchronous trigger source channel goes above a predefined level Rise or below the level Fall the synchronous trigger is set off and starts the observation of the wave window trigger Use
267. printer sn scenisk PIE BRIS eiren en ewan aes 4 9 6 17 linear Cie HI EE h nnie ernir irori ikasi Eirinen 5 5 Timeouts a A NA AN EA 1 11 AE r Ere E ES EERE EAE A ETSY 6 13 trigger delay oiis 5 3 5 7 5 9 Tris Per Filter sss cdcssasvesecieasearbagezssqesasngurvvsaysizoesvaieees trigger for automatic analysis of harmonics Trigger F ctons nosens E E tigger level orne eei E AKEN trigger mode 5 3 5 7 5 9 WISE o EE AAA AE 5 3 Turning ON OFF the Grid oes 12 16 Useable flash ATA memory cards 10 1 WAV O MRS iG rs Get E 9 4 Wave Window Trigger 1 9 width of the wave window ccseseeeeeeteeeeeeeeenee 5 7 width of the wave window trigger eceeeeeees 12 19 WADED kea reee batted E EEEE ERER 1 8 WID OUE siscsascsdiscsscscstesgeccusgesingencovevasaaseacteageseaaseceetctaye 1 8 wiring method 2 nsniecaenssrtecconemeeetenrneriee 9 2 9 7 WW trg level change ececeseesceseeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeees 12 19 X Y Recording mennan aides 7 6 Zero adjUSUN Eesi irosit irda 4 13 ZOOM facti e eate E Eas 4 7 ZOOMING sonerie neen iieii eissaia 6 16 IM OR100E 01E Index 3 3 Q D x
268. py under the following conditions While capturing measurement data While realtime recording While waiting for a trigger While accessing the flash ATA card or the FAX modem IM OR100E 01E 12 5 suolouny snooueuel aosi RI 12 3 Capturing Data using the External Sampling Clock You can use a TTL level signal with a maximum frequency of 100 kHz as a sampling clock to capture the measurement data Input Output terminal Input the signal in the TRIG IN EXT SAMPLE terminal Input circuit configuration 5V 5V 4 7kQ 1009 100pF 74LS07 or ar equivalent Maximum input voltage range 0 5 to 5 5V AN CAUTION Applying voltages outside the maximum input voltage to the input terminals may damage the input circuit Time div Press the Time Axis key and set the Time div displayed on the upper right of the screen to External For details see section 4 4 Setting the Time Axis Sample Rate Chart Speed Note To avoid erroneous operation due to noise use connection cables that are 3 m or less When using an external sampling clock to capture the data the A D conversion of the realtime data is also performed using the external sampling clock Therefore depending on the frequency the resolution of the display and the recording of the realtime data may go down If the data captured using the external sampling clock is displayed or recorded as an analog waveform
269. query to be restored However Some upper level queries will not return setting information that is not currently in use Please be aware that not all the group s information is output as a response Header Interpretation Rules This recorder interprets a received header according to the following rules Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example TRIGgexcan also be written as triggewr Trigger The lower case portion of a header can be omitted Example TRIGgexcan also be written as TRIGGEor TRIG The question mark at the end of the header denotes a query You can not omit the question mark Example TRIGger cannot be abbreviated to anything shorter than TRIG If the x numeric value at the end of the header is omitted it is assumed to be 1 Example If CHANne1l lt X gt is written as CHAN this represents CHANnel11 App 4 IM OR100E 01E Response Response On receiving a query from the controller this recorder returns a response message to the controller A response message is sent in one of the following two forms Response consisting of a header and data If the response can be used as a program message as it is the response message will include the header Response consisting of data only If the response cannot be used as a program message as it is it is a query only command the response message will include only the data However some query only commands will
270. r CHANne1 lt X gt TYPE lt X gt 1 to 4 For the normal trigger lt Character data gt OFF RISE FALL HIGH LOW BISLope WINOut WINIn For the wave window trigger lt Character data gt OFF ON TRIGGER CHANNEL1 TYPE OFF TRIGGER CHANNEL1 TYPE TRIGGER CHANNEL1 TYPE OFF TRIGger COMBination Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the AND OR logic for the normal trigger TRIGger COMBination AND OR TRIGger COMBinatiion TRIGGER COMBINATION AND TRIGGER COMBINATION TRIGGER COMBINATION AND TRIGger DELay Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the trigger delay TRIGger DELay lt NRf gt TRIGger DELay lt NR gt 100 to 100 This command is not available in realtime mode TRIGGER DELAY 20 TRIGGER DELAY TRIGGER DELAY 20 3 TRIGger EXTernal Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the contents of the external trigger for the normal trigger TRIGger EXTernal OFF RISE FALL TRIGger EXTernal TRIGGER EXTERNAL FALL TRIGGER EXTERNAL TRIGGER EXTERNAL FALL TRIGger FREQuency Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the frequency for the wave window trigger TRIGger FREQuency lt Frequency gt TRIGger FREQuency lt Frequency gt 50HZ 60HZ TRIGGER FREQUENCY 50HZ TRIGGER FREQUENCY TRIGGER FREQUENCY 50 TRIGger INTerval Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the tim
271. rate c al ulated 1 Format PE 5 Length 7 todi en Measurement time R NU ac E N Number of blocks Trigger kind Wave Window Trigger calculated from the memory length Memory clear Off Rep Trg stop condition Stop key 3 4 Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Logic 1234 4 Length Continue CH A Gauge print On CH B 0 BBA Grid Fine Pos Off Time print On CH message Off CH print Off Line CH 1 Thin CH 2 Thin CH 3 Thin CH 4 Thin izone 2zone Azone xY Operation Keys Displays the setting menu Makes a selection pere Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters 6 6 IM OR100E 01E 6 3 Setting the Display Format Operating Procedure 1 Setting the display format Set the display format with the F1 to F4 keys 1 zone Display Record every channel in one zone On the 4 channel model display record channels 1 and 2 in the upper zone and channels 3 and 4 in the lower zone On the 2 channel model display record channel 1 in the upper zone and channel 2 in the lower zone 4 zone Display Record channels 1 2 3 and 4 in order from the top zone XY Display Record X Y See 6 4 Setting the X Y Display Format 2 Setting the T axis Zoom factor Set the time axis zoom factor for the display recording with the F1
272. re set to Wave The setting of the recording format is also used for the recording of the captured data 5 Setting the gage record Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording 6 Setting the grid Set the grid type Off Do not record the grid Simple Record only the base line Fine Record thin lines 7 Setting the time record Set whether or not to record the date time and time of the data capture on the time axis IM OR100E 01E 7 3 Bulpiosey wnje y x 7 2 Setting the Recording Format of the Analog Waveform 8 Setting the channel message Select the message to record at the start of the data recording from the following Off Do not record channel messages Comment Record the comment set at the screen that appears when the channel key is pressed For setting the comment see 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments CH info Record the measurement range 9 Setting the channel record 10 11 Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Tag is set at the screen that appears when the channel key is pressed For details see 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments Switching between channel number and tag is done on the next page of the screen that appears when the SYSTEM key is pressed For details see 12 5 Setting Tags or 12 6 Setting Tags and Comments Setting the line for recording Select thin medium or
273. recording formats of the automatic analysis are the newer of the two settings waveform analysis and memory mode setting Accumulate display is not available Note When measuring power scale the measured value of the channel that will connect the clamp probe to the current value 9 2 IM OR100E 01E 9 2 Connecting Cables for Power Measurement When measuring the power automatic analysis connect the input signal cable as shown in the following figure Follow the warnings described in section 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable when connecting the cable Single phase Two wire Configuration CLAMP SENSOR H a L s SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE Three phase Three wire Configuration H L CLAMP SENSOR G SOURCE R r SOURCE s x lt x o 3 e 2 gt gt 2 lt Q o IM OR100E 01E 9 3 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data When specifying the range to analyze waveform analysis Setting screen Menu 1 Mode F 2 Anis Method 3 Frequency 5 Hz 4 peal pean pee e eee ep Measurement time orma dzone oc 5 Trigger kind Normal T gt Number of blocks calculated from the memory length 6 emory clear off 7 Rep Trg stop condition Stop key 8 lemory Printout Off PC card Off Print mode Wave Logic 1234 Length Continue CHA HHHH Gauge
274. rement data 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 Get range information for measurement GOSUB GET RANGE Set send condition for data PRINT 1 DATA FORMAT WORD Specify WORD format PRINT 1 DATA BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Send lower byte first PRINT 1 DATA START 0 Send start point 0 PRINT 1 DATA END 10 Send end point 10 PRINT 1 DATA CHAN1 SEND Request send CH1 data DS INPUTS 1 1 Read NS INPUTS 1 1 Read header length A VAL N Determine number of output data points BT 0 FOR I 1 TOA NS INPUTS 1 1 N VAL N BT BT N 10 A T Convert the number of bytes to a numerical value 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 NEXT I BT BT 2 Read the data Display and save the data to file FOR I 1 TO BT DS INPUTS 2 1 Read measurement values D ASC MID D 1 1 ASC MIDS D 2 1 256 IF D gt 32768 THEN D D 65536 DAT D RANGE FULL Convert A D values to physical values 500 PRINT DAT Display the physical values on the screen 510 520 530 540 550 560 PRINT 2 DAT NEXT I DS INPUTS 4 1 Skip over CRC and CR LF CLOSE END App 72 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 4 Sample Program 570 580 GET RANGE INT 1 DATA CHANNEL1 RANGE information LINE INPUT 1 AS 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 PR
275. revious password is incorrect change Enter the correct password 281 Invalid password Enter the correct password 282 The password is not input Enter the password IM OR100E 01E 13 9 Hunooys jqnolL Buns pue aoueuajuley 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures Communication Query Error Messages 400 to 499 Code Message Description Reference 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check the transmission and reception order App 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check the transmission and reception order App 2 430 Query DEADLOCKED Limit the length of the program message including the lt PMT gt to 1024 bytes or less 440 Query TERMINATED Do not enter queries after IDN or OPT after indefinite response System Error Communication 912 to 915 Code Message Description Reference 912 Fatal error in Needs servicing Communication driver 914 Time out error in Set the time out so that data can be received before communication the time out Or there may be a problem with the phone line Other 350 390 Code Message Description Reference 350 Queue error Read the error queue App 57 390 Overrun error Use a lower baud rate for RS 232 only Note Code 350 occurs when the error queue overflows This error is notified only during the STATus ERRor query and is not displayed on the screen 13 10 IM OR100E 01E 13 3 Testing the Recorder Setting scre
276. rid gt Copy action BMP file RMS Statis calc On Initialize To Next page E Display language English Tag Off Manual trigger key Valid Ext term start stop Invalid Key lock 7 ae Display grid WW trg level change Off Start time End time 0 O Change level CHI a CH2 0 CH3 CH4 ESC Go back to the Self test previous screen be 12 16 IM OR100E 01E 12 11 Turning ON OFF the Grid Operating Procedure Operation of the monitor screen At the screen that is displayed when the Monitor key is pressed press the Next key Pressing the F3 Grid key turns ON OFF the grid display Operation on the system menu At the screen that is displayed when the System key is pressed highlight Next and press the F1 OK key The next page is displayed Turn ON OFF the Display grid with the F1 Off or F2 On key IM OR100E 01E 12 17 SUOI IUNY SNOSUBUP 9ISI N RI 12 12 Temporarily Changing the Width of the Wave Window Trigger The width of the wave window trigger can be changed during a specified period Setting Scrren of time This is useful when changing the width of the wave window trigger according to the different power conditions that may exist between night and day Copy action BMP file RMS Statis calc On Next page Initialize To Next
277. rigger output TTL level pulse width 2 ms for synchronous operation RS 232 Interface Connector 9 pin DSUB connector male Electrical characteristics Conforms to EIA RS 232 Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Synchronization Start stop synchronization Functional specification Input Output setup data output measurement data External OR100E control except POWER ON OFF PC Card Interface External memory Supported cards Flash ATA memory card Supported card capacity Maximum 40 MB Functional specification Save setup data measurement data screen image Save format ASCII Binary BMP Modem communication Supported cards FAX Modem card Baud rate Maximum 19200 bps FAX control Class 2 card Functional specification Sending measurement data receiving setting commands automatic sending of measurement data FAX only 14 12 IM OR100E 01E 14 9 General Specifications Measurement mode Memory mode realtime mode realtime amp memory mode harmonic analysis mode Number of channels Analog 2 or 4 channels Logic 8 bits connects up to two 4 bit probes Internal memory capacity OR100E standard 32 kdata ch 64 kdata 2 ch linking 128 kdata 4 ch linking OR100E with long memory option and OR300E 128 kdata ch 256 kdata 2 ch linking 512 kdata 4 ch linking Internal memory type SRAM with battery backup Power supply Commercially sold AAA Alkaline dry cells dedicated AC adapter dedicated DC DC conver
278. rmat Setting parameters Description Format Select the display format from 1 zone 2 zone or 4 zone T axis zoom factor Set the T axis zoom factor for the display screen Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the display position of the logic channel Setting the recording format Setting parameters Description Format Select 1 zone 2 zone or 4 zone Hulpsooey owiyjeoy llyM Burunjdeg eyed Setting the Chart speed Set the chart speed in time div Record mode Select whether to record the analog waveform or the digital values Record length Select whether to record the captured data with the same zoom factor as the display zoom factor or expand reduce to A4 or AS size to record This parameter is invalid when recording digital values Interval time Set only when recording digital values Set the recording interval Gague record Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording Grid Select the grid type Time record Set whether or not to record the time record of the captured data Channel message Select whether or not to record comments or measurement range information Channel record Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Line Set the thickness of the line used to record the analog waveform Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the record position of the logic channel I
279. rresponding physical value There are two ways to enter the voltage Entering the value directly Use the panel keys to enter the value Entering the current input voltage as the voltage value Press the F3 Measure key to enter the current input signal value If you selected 751550 in step 2 the scale value matching the output of YOKOGAWA 751550 clamp probe is entered After entering the voltage value and the physical value press the F4 Enter key Scroll key effective 1234567890 E an a Od Sets the current input Confirms the setting signal to the voltage value Note The ranges for setting the voltage value and the scaling value are as follows 1 0x10 lt x lt 1 0x10 0 1 0x10 lt x lt 1 0x10 Set exponential representation using E 1 0E 8 1 0x10 Linear scaling is not possible when the input type is set to TC 5 Setting Point2 P2 Enter the values in the similar way as entering the values for Pointl IM OR100E 01E 4 11 Buljeos 1e u17 pue sixy owl a 14 obuey JuUowssnsesyy ayy Buas eS 4 7 Monitor Display Zero Adjust Setting Screen Sep 02 97 21 24 MONITOR Operation mode 1U DIV 1U DIVI V DIV voltage value per 1 DIV Display update rate Mo n itor e10szdiv UDN 1U DIU List Grid W DN E E 1010 Zero cal Zero adjust Operation Keys
280. s automatically assigned When data capture is stopped the most recent 128 k of data are saved to the internal memory if the number of data points is less than 128 k then all the data are saved Displaying and Recording the Data Capture Time Normally the data capture time that is saved is a relative time with respect to the trigger point However if the number of data points captured exceeds 128 k the time is an absolute value The absolute time is expressed as hour minute second X XX where XXX is a value between 000 and 999 Note Set the operation mode to Memory and the kind of trigger to Normal Otherwise PC card cannot be specified for the memory length Set the trigger to Free or Single Set the time axis to 50 ms div 16000 S s or less An external sampling clock cannot be used If the memory length is set to PC card when the time axis setting exceeds 50 ms div the time axis setting is automatically changed to 50 ms div In addition if the memory length is set to PC card when the time axis setting is External the time axis is automatically C o gt Q m gt x lt gt D 2 o changed to 2 min div When the sampling rate is greater than or equal to 400 S s time and channel number tag are not displayed Trigger delay is void In some cases the actual data capture starts a few seconds 10 to 100 seconds after the START
281. s not cleared by inquiring with ESE follows lt Manufacturer gt lt Model gt lt Serial No gt lt Firmware version gt lt Model gt will be OR100E lt Serial No gt is always 0 App 62 IM OR100E 01E OPT Function Syntax Example Description PSC Function Syntax Example RST Function Syntax Example Description SRE Function Syntax Example Description Queries installed options OPT OPT 2CHANNELS 32K A reply sequence is returned as follows lt Number of channels gt lt Memory length per channel gt OPT must always be the last query in a program message If there is another query after this one an error will occur Sets Queries whether or not to clear the following registers when the power is turned ON They are cleared if a nonzero value is specified Standard event enable register Extended event enable register Transition filter PSC lt NRf gt PSC lt NR gt 0 Do not clear non 0 Clear besides cleare PSC 1 PSC P gt 1 Resets the current settings RST RST This command is equivalent to the INITialize EXECute command Sets Queries the value of the service request enable register SRE lt NR gt SRE lt NR gt 0t0255 SRE 239 SRE gt 239 lt NRf gt is the sum of the bits expressed as a decimal number Since bit 6 MSS of the status byte register is the MSS b
282. s of the measurement range with F1 to F4 keys Data acquisition starts when the measured value of the synchronous channels exceeds this level If the trigger mode is free you are finished with the settings For single and repeat continue with the following steps 4 Setting the kind of analysis Set the kind of analysis with F1 to F3 keys The parameter set here will be the trigger source When the result of the analysis exceeds the level that is set in the latter step measured data and result of the analysis are saved 5 Setting channels Set the channels for triggering with F1 to F4 keys 6 Setting trigger level Set the trigger level in terms of percentages with F1 to F4 keys If the parameter to be analyzed is relative harmonic content then set the corresponding harmonic order Note Trigger type is fixed to rise Trigger delay is 0 IM OR100E 01E 5 13 Bunebb6uy pe 5 6 Setting Trigger for Automatic Analysis of Harmonics Trigger for Automatic Analysis of Harmonics The following flow chart shows the operation when the trigger mode is set to repeat Start measurement Did the measured value on the synchronized channe exceed the specified level Store one cycle of the measured data in the block t Harmonic analysis Did the result of the analysis of any channel exceed the specified level NO Save the measured dat
283. s to occur Example STATus FILTer1 FALL STATus EESR TRIGger MODE SINGle ACTion STARt1 lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus EESR COMMunication WAIT 1 DATA CHANne11 SEND lt PMT gt STATus FILTerl FALL indicates that the transit filter is set so that bit 0 FILTer of the extended event register is set to 1 when bit 0 of the condition register changes from 1 to 0 STATus EESR is used to clear the extended event register COMMunicate WAIT 1 indicates to wait for bit 0 of the extended event register to change to yp DATA CHANnel SEND will not be executed until bit 0 of the extended event register changes to yp App 8 IM OR100E 01E Appendix 1 2 Commands Appendix 1 2 Commands Command Description Page ACTion Group ACTion ADJust Executes zero adjust App 16 ACTion AUTorange Executes auto range App 16 ACTion LCDLight Sets queries the ON OFF condition of the LCD back lighting App 16 ACTion PRINt lt X gt Starts printer related operation App 16 ACTion STARt lt X gt Starts a memory operation such as measurement display and App 16 recording ACTion STOP Stops aborts operations such as measurement display and App 16 recording ACTion TDIV Set queries the time axis rate of the monitor screen App 16 BLOCK Group BLOCk Queries all the memory block settings App 17 BLOCk ACTual Queries the number of blocks already sam
284. se the tag App 53 Sets Queries the type of telephone line used for FAX MODEM App 53 Sets Queries the destination telephone number 2 for FAX MODEM App 53 Sets Queries the destination telephone number for FAX MODEM App 53 Sets queries the function used to change the width of the wave window trigger Queries all trigger settings App 53 App 57 Queries all setting values relating to the specified analog CH for App 57 triggering Sets Queries the trigger filter amount of the specified analog CH App 57 for the normal trigger Sets Queries the trigger filter of the specified analog CH for the App 57 normal trigger Sets Queries the trigger levels of the specified analog CH for the App 57 normal trigger Sets Queries the ideal waveform offset for the wave window trigger App 57 Sets Queries the ideal waveform peak for the wave window trigger App 57 Sets Queries the ideal waveform phase for the wave window trigger App 58 Sets Queries the width of the wave window trigger Sets Queries the trigger type of the specified analog CH Sets Queries the AND OR logic for the normal trigger Sets Queries the trigger delay Sets Queries the contents of the external trigger for the normal trigger Sets Queries the frequency for the wave window trigger Sets Queries the time trigger interval after the start time App 58 App 58 App 58 App 58 App 58 App 58 App 58 Queries all the setting values of the trigger for automatic ana
285. sed When handshaking is used the recorder signals the computer to stop when the data in the buffer cannot be processed fast enough and the free area drops to 64 bytes After stopping the reception of the data data in the buffer continues to be passed to the internal program When the free area increases to 192 bytes it starts receiving the data again Regardless of the handshaking if the buffer becomes full all additional data are not stored and are lost Data Receive Control using Handshaking Note The program on the personal computer must be designed so that the receive buffers on the recorder and the personal computer do not become FULL 11 6 IM OR100E 01E 11 4 Matching the Data Format The RS 232 interface on the recorder communicates using start stop synchronization With the start stop synchronization a start bit is added every time a character is transmitted Then the data bits parity bit and stop bit follows See the figure below Circuit back to Circuit idle state 1 character idle state dotted line Start bit of the next data lt Data bits gt solid line 7 or 8 bits TPP da a ttt PStop bit i I I o I I oot i eE HE Parity bit Start bit Even odd or none or 2 bits 2 IM OR100E 01E 11 7 suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Buisn ey 11 5 Setting the RS 232 Setting Screen SYSTEM m Communication
286. sed your instrument please quote the instrument No Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Roll chart Measurement input cable Belt AAA allaline dry cell 6 Users manual OR122 0R322 2 OR142 0R342 4 In addition to the accessories listed above AC adapter battery pack and carrying case are also included for models with the PM suffix code 2 IM OR100E 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available On receiving these optional accessories make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional accessories or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument 4 ch logic plobe 788031 4 ch high voltage logic plobe 788035 DC DC converter 9 to 18 VDC input model 788025 1 18 to 36 VDC input model 788025 2 36 to 60 VDC input model 788025 3 logic plobe read B9879PX ZF S B9879KX AC adapter 788011 M F R S UL CSA Standard VDE Standard SAA Standard BS Standard Temperature input Rechargeable battery pack Carring case 788081 Small carring case 788082 adapter 788041 NiMHbattery 788021 IM OR100E 01E 3 Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument double insulation
287. sesssrsersrsrsesseseses 4 6 4 5 Setting the Time Axis Sample Rate Chart Speed s sesssesssesesesersrsesrersrsesrerrerrereeee 4 8 4 6 Setting the Linear Scali nnan a a AAR AARNA 4 10 4 7 Monitor Display Zero Adjust nseri iiie iri aed 4 12 Chapter 5 Triggering Sis S T eT A LE AEA EE EA EAEE T E EEE 5 1 5 2 Setting the Normal Trigger 0 e aeeie h oeer eers aere RE Teeni 5 2 5 3 Setting the Logic Trigger and Other Triggers seessessssssseseesesersrsesrersrrerrerrerrerreen 5 4 5 4 Setting the Wave Window Trigger oo ccecsesceeseeseeecseeeeececeeseeecseeaeeecseeatessesetaeeas 5 6 5 5 Triggering with the Manual Trigger Key 0 0 0 ecceeeseeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeteeeeseeaees 5 10 5 6 Setting Trigger for Automatic Analysis of Harmonics 00 0 cece eseeeseeseteeeeeeeeees 5 12 IM OR100E 01E Contents Chapter 6 Data Capturing 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 Setting Parameters yesevi ses eek a weer Birra hacer Be eae eevee ene 6 1 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data 00 teeters 6 2 Setting the Display Format 0 s cscccccecssssssscsteseseserscetcereseoteoseassecsesevereoesaseesevendoteatens 6 6 Setting the X Y Display Format 6 8 Startin G Stoppin ss secs cess net on bee ade Seanad Seen a clon sstageeb cae dees eee 6 9 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform cee 6 10 Recording the Captured Data as Digital Values Zooming In or
288. set of selections Moves between setting parameters 6 14 IM OR100E 01E 6 7 Recording the Captured Data as Digital Values Operation Procedure 1 Setting the recording mode Set the recording mode with F1 Wave key or F2 Numeric key Here press the F2 key to select Numeric 2 Setting the record interval Set the record interval from the following 1 data Record all data points 10 data Record every ten data points 100 data Record every one handred data points 3 Setting the logic channel Setting whether or not to record the logic input Set the display record to ON OFF for each bit When a check mark is in the check box it is ON Otherwise it is OFF Position sets whether or not to record the logic data Off Do not record Both Bottom Equal Record each bit of the measurement data using 0 and 1 Note All settings besides the ones shown above do not affect the digital value recording 4 Recording the captured data After selecting the block on the playback screen pressing the PRINT key starts the recording For selecting the block see page 11 To set the recording range press the F1 Print key to display the screen for setting the recording range To specify the range with the cursor use the SCROLL CURSOR key Pressing the F4 Exec key starts the recording 3 88ms Prt area E 7 88 ms N LEs m eer
289. setting is cancelled e A message indicating the present condition is displayed at the lower left of the screen when the measurement is started e When the time axis setting is longer than 500 ms div the captured waveform is displayed at the same time that the measurement is started trigger is activated e When the time axis setting is 200 ms div the captured analog waveform is displayed at the same time that the trigger is activated This applies if the trigger is not set to free mode and the zoom factor of the time axis is less than or equal to x1 e When the time axis setting is shorter than 100 ms div the waveform is displayed after all data capture is completed 2 Stopping the measurement Pressing the STOP key stops the measurement The last captured data block is displayed on the screen IM OR100E 01E 6 9 6 6 Displaying Recording the Captured Data as an Analog Waveform Setting the recording format Setting screen Same as the _ display format Operation Keys ONOORWD mMenu Mode 4 kS s Format Azone Length 18d iv Eanes MT T seale Mag x1 32block Trigger kind Normal Memory clear Off Rep Trg stop condition Stop key Accumulate display Off Memory Calculation Off Printout Off PC card VORT sy Print mode Wave Logic 123 4 4 Length Continue CH A Gauge print On CH B B Grid Fine Pos Off TT Time print On CH message
290. setup data were saved then the following setup parameters will not change Memory length during memory mode Record length during realtime mode IM OR100E 01E 10 17 Cc o gt Q m gt x lt gt D 2 o 10 8 Deleting Files Setting Screen FILE BR WON rm Save Load PC Card 9MByte Mode Panel Function Delete File name GSD Execute Filename Filetime AA 09701701 00 39 PANELI 89 01 01 04 13 PANEL2 09 01 01 04 14 A list of files Makes a selection Tea D Moves between setting parameters Displays the setting menu 10 18 IM OR100E 01E 10 8 Deleting Files Operating Procedure 1 Selecting the data Select the data type with the F1 Data or F2 Panel key 2 Setting the function Select the operation Select the F4 Delete key to delete the measurement data Select the F3 Delete key to delete the setup data To delete all the files on the PC card press the Next key and select F2 All del Then go to step 4 3 Selecting the filename A list of files that can be deleted is displayed Select the file with the F1 T or F2 L key 4 Executing the load Highlighting Execute and pressing the F1 Execute key deletes the file Note The OR100E OR300E cannot delete files that were saved in ASCII for
291. soss 5 00U 1V DIV Full scale 2 5 9QU 3 5 00V 1V DIV 3 5 004 4 5 BAY 1V DIV 4 5 004 Measurement _ 7 7 EYE l DIU range Input Fi ye Null Scaling DC __ Vvjoff Off Vj amp Comm Setting the Measurement Range Automatically Auto range i a 1U DIU 1H 1U DIV Freeze auto Rngl _ Bright gt lg TU DIUIIgu DIu Displays the setting menu Operation Keys Sets the measurement range Makes a selection Displays the monitor screen 4 4 IM OR100E 01E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Range Operating Procedure 1 Setting the Measurement Range The measurement range is set according to the input signal There are two methods to set the range manual range and auto range Manual range The range is set at the screen that appears when the channel key is pressed The current input signal is displayed on the screen The measurement range when the input type is set to DC or RMS is specified in terms of a voltage corresponding to 1 division of the grid displayed on the screen Pressing the upper part of the RANGE button increases the measurement range Pressing the lower part of the RANGE button decreases the measurement range The relationship between the V div and the measurement range is as follows Vidiv Measurement range Acrual measurement DC RMS 10 mV DIV 100 mV 100 0 mV 0 to 100 0 mVrms 20 mV DIV 20
292. spended for approximately 30 s IM OR100E 01E 12 19 SUOI IUNY SNOSUBCUP 9ISI RI Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Testing 13 1 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the methods to correct problems that might occur with your recorder If a message is displayed on the screen check 13 2 Messages and Corrective Measures If the recorder needs servicing or the condition does not improve after taking the corrective measures contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer listed on the back cover of this manual Problem Things to Check Reference Page The recorder does not Check that the power switch located on the left side of 1 10 2 17 turn ON the recorder is turned ON Check that the power cord is firmly plugged into the 2 13 power outlet Check that the batteries are properly installed 2 11 2 15 If you are using the NiMH battery pack 2 16 check that the battery is recharged Check that you are not using power outside the allowable 2 13 power supply voltage The setup data are Change the backup battery if the Battery flat message initialized when the power appears on the screen is turned OFF The life of the backup battery is about 10 years The panel keys do not Wait for the operation to complete or abort the operation operate with the STOP key Then operate the keys During data capturing While waiting for trigger While PC card is being accessed Test t
293. sses the test 0 is returned If it fails the test a value other than 0 is returned The sum of the following bits is output as an integer decimal ROM Test Result 0 Pass 1 Fail a opeet 0 Pass 1 Fail E 0 Pass 1 Fail Bit3 to bit7 are empty always 0 Description If it passes the test 0 is returned If it fails the test a value other than 0 is returned SELFtest PRINter Function Performs printer test Syntax SELFtest PRINTer Example SELFTEST PRINTER IM OR100E 01E App 43 gt 3 ke 5 x STATIs Group STATIs Group The commands in the STATIs group deals with statistical calculation cl O Came O4 Came Ye ORE TD INTEG2 OQOQOQO RMS C e j a C o w z 4 O ee al CDO crane Hae OL Conde Aas FLL Content THD1 TRMS O POWer lt xX gt O ACTPower Giz O o EEA C Prase JC Crus CO TDO STARt lt Space gt lt NRf gt CNE E i Co o o o 1 Ca Is App 44 IM OR100E 01E STATIS Function Queries all setting values relating to statistical calculation Syntax STATIs Example STATIS STATIS END 2000 START 0 STATIs CHANnel lt X gt AVG Function Queries the average value of the calculation result of the specified analog CH Syntax STATIs CHANnel lt X gt AVG lt X
294. string gt HH MM SS HH Hour 00 to 23 MM Min 00 to 59 SS Sec 00 to 59 SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 02 08 56 SYSTEM CLOCK TIME SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 02 08 56 SYSTem ETime Function _Sets queries the time at which the width of the wave window trigger is reset to the original value Syntax SYSTem ETime lt character string gt SySTem ETime Example SYSTEM ETIME 06 00 00 SYSTEM ETIME SYSTEM ETIME 06 00 00 SYSTem GRID Function Sets queries whether or not to display the grid Syntax SYSTem GRID lt Boolean gt SYSTem GRID Example SYSTEM GRID ON SYSTEM GRID SYSTEM GRID 1 SYSTem HEADer Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the header to the FAX message SYSTem HEADer lt character string data gt SYSTem HEADer SYSTEM HEADER OR100E SYSTEM HEADER SYSTEM HEADER OR100E SYSTem LANGuage Function Syntax Example Sets Queries the display language SYSTem LANGuage ENGLish JAPanese SYSTem LANGuage SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH App 52 IM OR100E 01E SYSTem Group SYSTem MTKey Manual Trigger Key SYSTem TNUMber Tel Number Function _Sets Queries the manual trigger key Function Sets Queries the destination telephone Syntax SYSTem MTKey INValid VALid number for FAX MODEM SYSTem MTKey Syntax SYSTem TNUMber lt character Example SYSTE
295. surement range specified by the ng screen Start key channel key Scales specified by the Starts data capturing to the the captured waveform Channel key At the memory or starts recording to the display in the voltage display of captured builtin printer vertical axis direction T this key ra wavefom in L Monitor key time axis direction Status indicator Monitors Displays the key Turns green during measurement measurement input Displays the captured File key Back light key waveform Displays the screen for Tums the LCD back Displaying the reading writing the measurement lighting ON OFF ia the data setup data to the PC card i i culating Hb eakarn A Statistics on an interval System key nicks aye whence pore oe perpen key lock function is set Menu key is i ON Displays the screen to Trigger key Manual trigger key set the conditions for Displays the screen for setting the Pressing this key sets capturing measurement trigger off the trigger when in data display the trigger wait state format record format IM OR100E 01E T 1 2 System Configuration Block Diagram O Analog Photo O Analog Photo AID Memory O Input coupler LCD O Analog Photo O Analog Photo Logic Probe Logic Probe 32bit RISC CPU Acquisition Controler I O A D Converter Each channel has an 11 bit A D converter with maximum sample rate of 400 kS s 80 kS s for wave window trigger which ensures simultaneity of measur
296. t lt NRf gt J LEVel ai lt Space gt INTerval OOO lt Space gt OFF Crom vo gt PATTern X lt Space gt L pO bed n TYPE lt Space gt C oF pas Cao y xipueddy E IM OR100E 01E App 55 TRIGger Group CONEA CEE If O tt REPeat IDEal C RWAVe D ef lt Space gt C gt O CsT J lt Space gt character string gt CHANnel lt Space gt Ea J App 56 IM OR100E 01E TRIGger Group TRIGger TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt FILTer Function Queries all trigger settings Function Sets Queries the trigger filter of the Syntax TRIGger specified analog ch for the normal trigger Example TRIGGER TRIGGER MODE FREE Syntax TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt CHANNEL1 TYPE RISE FILTER ON FILTer OFF ON TIMeout LEVEL1 0 FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL2 TYPE WINOUT TRIGger CHANnel lt X gt FILTer FILTER ON LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 0 Example TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FILTER OFF FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER CHANNEL3 TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FILTER TYPE FALL FILTER ON LEVEL1 0 TRIGGER CHANNEL1 FCOUNT 1 TRIGGER CHANNEL4 FILTER OFF TYPE BISLOPE LEVEL1 0 TRIGGER COMBI
297. t or query communication parameters lt Space gt lt Space gt LOCKout lt Space gt VERBose lt Space gt OFF lt NRf gt COMMunicate COMMunicate HEADer Function Queries all the communication settings Function Sets queries whether or not the header is Syntax COMMunicate returned in response to a query Example COMMUNICATE Syntax COMMunicate HEADer lt Boolean gt COMMUNICATE HEADER1 COMMunicate HEADer VERBOSE 1 Example COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER COMMUNICATE HEADER 1 gt 3 ke 5 x IM OR100E 01E App 21 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets releases local lockout Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt COMMunicate LOCKout Example COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Description The recorder is always in the local state at power up COMMunicate REMote Function Sets remote local ON is remote Syntax COMMunicate REMote lt Boolean gt COMMunicate REMote Example COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 Description To switch back from the remote state to the local state initiate the communication command COMMunicate REMote OFF or press the NEXT key You cannot use any of the keys except the NEXT key during the remo
298. t the upper left corner of the screen PC card eject button Top surface of the flash ATA card Removing the Flash ATA Card Check that the flash ATA card is not being accessed and press the PC card eject button on the side of the PC card slot CAUTION Do not remove the flash ATA card while it is being accessed as this may damage the files saved on the card or the flash ATA card itself For general handling precautions refer to the instructions supplied with the flash ATA card 10 2 IM OR100E 01E 10 2 Setting Parameters The parameters shown below will be set in this chapter Saving Loading Measurement or Setup Data You will set the parameters using the screen that appears when the FILE key is pressed Setting parameter Description Mode Select the data to save or load Select Data measurement data or Panel setup data Function Set the function Select Save B save in binary format save A save in ASCII format Load load or Delete delete All blocks Save measured data of all blocks in binary format Filename Set the filename Save Option Valid when the function is Save B or Save A Set whether to save all of the internal memory or to specify the channel and range of the channel to save IM OR100E 01E 10 3 C o gt Q m gt x lt gt D 2 o 10 3 Saving the M
299. te state If you have set the local lockout the NEXT keys is also ineffective you cannot use any of the keys COMMunicate STATus Function Queries status specific to the line Syntax COMMunicate STATus Example COMMUNICATE STATUS 0 Description Description of the status bits BitO Parity error 1 Framing error 2 BREAK character detected 3 to Always 0 When one the event above occurs the corresponding status bit is set The bits are cleared when the status is read COMMunicate VERBose Function Sets queries whether the response to a query is returned in full or abbreviated form COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate WAIT Syntax Example Function Waits for any of the specified extended events to occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 See extended event register page App 57 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 COMMunicate WAIT Function Generates a response when any of the specified extended events occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT lt Register gt lt Register gt 0 to 65535 See extended event register page App 57 Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 1 App 22 IM OR100E 01E DATA Group DATA Group The commands in the DATA group deal with the setting parameters and the measured data O Sr ae ame i ree
300. ter dedicated NiMH battery pack Recharging the dedicated NiMH battery pack can be done inside the recorder only AC adapter or DC DC converter has priority over battery when both are used simultaneously External power supply input by the AC adapter 12 V 10 Dedicated AC adapter sold separately Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permissible supply voltage range 90 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permissible supply voltage frequency range 48 to 62 Hz Maximum power consumption 70 to 90 VAC AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A DC DC converter sold separately Permissible power supply voltage 788025 1 9 VDC to 18 VDC 788025 2 18 VDC to 36 VDC Output voltage range 12 VDC 5 20 VAMAX Dedicated NiMH battery pack sold separately 2100 mAh 7 2 V Number of recharges cycle life About 300 times depends on environment AAA dry cell batteries AAA Alkaline dry cells JIS IEC model No LR6 6 batteries Recharge function of the dedicated NiMH battery pack Use dedicated battery pack connect dedicated AC adapter turn OFF power switch for recharge mode Recharge time about 1 5 hours IM OR100E 01E 14 13 suoneoyioeds z 14 9 General Specifications Power consumption When using AC adapter 25 VA Max When using batteries 20 VA max Warm up time 30 minutes Withstand voltage Between OR100E OR300E and power line of dedicated AC adapter 2 kVA
301. ter the recorder stops the data sending When it receives the next X ON code it resumes the data sending CS signal from the computer is ignored Receive data control Hardware handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When the free area of the receive buffer reaches 64 bytes the recorder sets RS False When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sets RS True Send data control Hardware handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When CS becomes False while sending data to the computer the recorder stops the data sending When CS becomes True it resumes the data sending X OFF is treated as data Receive data control Hardware handshaking is performed between the recorder and the computer When the free area of the receive buffer reaches 64 bytes the recorder sets RS False When the free area increases to 192 bytes it sets RS True IM OR100E 01E 11 5 suolouny uoljeoiunwiwos Buisn ey 11 3 Handshaking Precautions on Data Receive Control When handshaking is used to control the receive data additional data may be received even if the free area drops below 64 bytes If the receive buffer becomes full all extra data are discarded regardless of the handshaking When free area becomes available again data will be stored lt ________ 256 bytes gt E J Used Free 64 bytes a a Used Free 192 bytes Fo U
302. ternal Trigger Output Trig out This terminal outputs a TTL level trigger signal This terminal is also used when operating multiple OR100Es OR300Es synchronously External Sampling Clock Ext sample This terminal is used to input a TTL level sampling clock This terminal is shared with the external trigger input Note Use cables that are 3 m or less to avoid erroneous operation due to noise Separate the signal cables from power cords and cables that emit noise Also avoid running the cables in parallel To prevent an emission of electromagnetic disturbances separate the external I O wires from the power supply and measurement input and logic input wires by at least 10 cm 50 cm or more is recommended IM OR100E 01E 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable Connecting Logic Input Signals Logic Probe Logic input consists of channels A and B Each channel consists of 4 bits giving a total of 8 bits of input The accessory logic probe is used to connect to the measurement points There are two types of logic input normal logic probe and high voltage logic probe For the normal logic probe you can use either an alligator clip or an IC clip to connect to the measurement point You can select the input level TTL level or contact input with the switch on the logic probe For the high voltage logic probe you can use the alligator clip measurement lead to connect to the measurement point The case and the logic probe are insu
303. the AC adapter Note When the LED is blinking slowly LED is on for about 1 s recharge is on standby Recharge is put on standby for the following conditions If the battery temperature is outside 10 C to 35 C range If the battery performance has deteriorated drastically from over discharge for example The LED blinks rapidly to indicate that the recharge has completed However there are cases when the battery may not be recharged as in the following cases If the battery temperature exceeded 55 C while recharging If the environment temperature changes drastically Indication to Recharge When the battery need recharging a Z is displayed on the upper left of the screen When this mark is displayed recharge the batteries immediately Operation time between charges Though it depends on how it is used See the following table for a typical figure Condition Operation Time Trigger wait condition without options About 3 hours and 30 minutes Recording an 1 Hz cycle waveform with 2 s div setting About 3 hours 2 16 IM OR100E 01E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF When Using the DC DC converter The following models are available for the different input voltages 788025 1 For 12 VDC 788025 2 For 24 VDC 788025 3 For 48 VDC Specfication Permissible power supply voltage 788025 1 9 VDC to 18 VDC 788025 2 18 VDC to 36 VDC 788025 3 36 VDC to 60 VDC Output voltage range 12 VDC 5 20
304. the Contrast You can adjust the contrast of the screen by turning the knob beside the power switch IM OR100E 01E 2 19 uoneiodo a10jog D 2 5 Loading the Chart Follow the procedures below to load the roll chart Have the power turned ON 1 Slide the part indicated by a on the chart paper cover in the direction of the arrow and open the cover 2 Pull the release lever on the left side to a vertical position 3 Bend the chart holder and load the chart paper in the direction as in the figure Load the right side as you face the printer first 4 Fold the front end of the roll chart back about 10 mm in the direction as in the figure 5 Rotate the roll chart in the direction as in the figure Stop when the front end of the chart reaches the chart slot 6 After rotating the roll chart by a small amount in the opposite direction as in step 5 press the FEED key to feed the chart until about 80 mm is showing from the chart paper exit section Then adjust it so that the section of the paper that is showing is aligned with the roll chart 7 After pressing the release lever down firmly to the original position slide the front end of the chart through the chart guide of the chart paper cover Then while gently pulling on the chart showing at the front of the product close the chart paper cover 8 Press the FEED key and check that the paper feeds properly Note The last meter of the chart has a red ban
305. the following items are excluded X Y display is not available Time axis scale is the most recent scale specified either by the memory mode or by the latest display of the measurement data The time axis scale can be changed using the Time Axis key on the display screen after capturing the measurement data as in the memory mode Accumulation of display is not available IM OR100E 01E sishjeuy d1uOWIeH 9 5 Analyzing by Specifying the Range Starting the measurement Pressing the START key starts the measurement Pressing the STOP key stops the measurement For details see 6 5 Starting Stopping The measurement data are captured in the harmonic analysis mode in the same way as in the memory mode Selecting the block to display Pressing the PLAYBACK key while the measurement is stopped displays the waveform of the block containing the measurement data most recently captured Pressing the F3 Block key displays a menu for selecting the block to display Select the block using F2 and F3 keys For details see pages 6 12 and 6 13 ex 5 GHz Block 3 8 Analysis Cursor Block Print gt 4 ESC Content Yf CH 3 VI Execute Go back to the previous screen Display block information One block backward One block forward When displaying the block information the block of which the information is displayed is changed Note If you change the block the result of the previous
306. time Format Select the recording format from 1 zone 2 zone or 4 zone Record length Set the record length Select continuous 20 div 200 div or 800 div for L1 or L2 model Record format Sets whether or not to realtime record Set to Wave Gauge record Select whether or not to record the scale value for each channel at the end of the recording Grid Time record Channel message Select the grid type Set whether or not to record the time record of the captured data Select whether or not to record comments or measurement range information Channel record Select whether or not to record the channel numbers or tags Line Set the thickness of the line used to record the analog waveform Logic Set the display of each bit to ON OFF and the record position of the logic channel Recording format of digital values Setting parameters Description Operation mode Select whether to save the measurement data to memory or realtime record with the built in printer Select Realtime Format Select a recording format other than XY Record length Set the record length Select continuous 20 div 200 div or 800 div for L1 or L2 model Record format Sets whether or not to realtime record Set to Numeric Interval time Set only when recording digital values Sets the recording interval Playback Set the recording int
307. tion register 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus CONDition o cHa o 0 0 o RNG psp cic acs PRN TST caL TRG o RUN ner yy yy YY YY yy YY Py Transition filter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RISE FALL BOTH NEVer YvYyYvYyyYyvyY YY YY YY 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3j 2 1 0 Extended event register STATus EESR The meaning of each bit of the condition register is as follows Bit 0 RUN Running Set to 1 during acquisition Bit 2 TRG Awaiting trigger Set to 1 when the unit is awaiting a trigger Bit 3 CAL Calibrating Set to 1 during calibration Bit 4 TST Testing Set to 1 during self test Bit 5 PRN Printing Set to 1 while the built in printer is in operation Bit 6 ACS Accessing Set to 1 during access of the floppy disk hard disk or MO disk Bit 7 CLC Caliculation Set to 1 during Caliculation Bit 9 DSP Display Set to 1 during auto set up Bit 10 RNG Range Set to 1 during auto range setting Bit 14 CHA Chart erro Set to 1 when chart empty The filter is applied to each bit of the condition register seperately and can be selected from the following Note that the numbering of the bits used in the filter setting differs from the actual bit number 1 to 16 vs 0 to 15 Rise The bit of the extended event register becomes 1 when the bit
308. to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the trigger channel for the automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt CHANnel OFF lt NRE gt TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt CHANnel lt X gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 1 to 4 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 CHANNEL 1 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 CHANNEL TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 CHANNEL 1 TRIGger TRIGger Group HARMonic CONDition lt X gt LEVel Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Sets queries the trigger level for the automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt LEVel lt NRf gt TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt LEVel lt X gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 0 0 to 1000 0 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 LEVEL 123 4 TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 LEVEL TRIGGER HARMONIC CONDITION1 LEVEL 123 4 TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt ORDer Valid only when the operation mode is set to harmonic and the analysis method is set to automatic analysis Function Syntax Example Description TRIGger Sets queries the harmonic order used in triggering during the automatic analysis TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt ORDer lt NRf gt TRIGger HARMonic CONDition lt X gt ORDer lt X gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 1 to 40 TRIGGER HARMONIC CON
309. trigger Set only when the trigger is set to repeat Set the stop condition with the F1 and F2 keys Stop Key Memory Full Overwrite the data until the STOP key is pressed Stop the measurement after capturing enough data to fill the memory If you start the data capture in the middle of the internal memory the data is captured up to the block immediately before the block you started on i gt So Shes fee ieee sce r ogogggodd End block Start block 6 4 IM OR100E 01E 6 2 Setting the Conditions on Capturing the Measurement Data 6 Setting the operation after data capturing The following operation is performed automatically after capturing one block of measurement data Use the F1 Off and F2 On keys to set the operation Interval calculation Displays the maximum minimum values If expansion calc is ON the RMS value and the calculated area are also displayed Print output Record with the built in printer The recording format is the format specified in 6 5 Recording the Captured Data PC card Send the measurement data over FAX modem or save the data to the PC card For details see 9 3 Saving the Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card or 11 9 Sending the Measurement Data over the FAX Modem IM OR100E 01E Bulinjdey ea fo 6 3 Setting the Display Format Setting screen mMenu Mode Memor 4akSvslq Sample
310. trigger delay 5 Setting the frequency Select 50 60 Hz according to the measurement signal 6 Setting the synchronous trigger Set the trigger synchronous trigger to synchronize the start of the wave window trigger Select the source channel of the synchronous trigger from the measurement input Select Rise or Fall for the trigger condition Set the trigger level as a percentage of the measurement range of the source channel of the synchronous trigger 7 Setting ON OFF Set the wave window trigger to ON OFF for each channel 8 Setting parameters relating to the reference signal Set the reference signal for the wave window for each channel Set the peak value and offset as a percentage of the measurement range Peak value Sia Phase 90 degrees 9 Setting the width of the wave window Set the width of the wave window as a percentage of the measurement range 10 Setting the time trigger For information about the time trigger setting see page 5 5 IM OR100E 01E 5 7 Bunebb6uy pe 5 4 Setting the Wave Window Trigger When Creating the Wave Window with the Input Signal Setting Screen mMenu Mode Format Length T scale Mag Memory 4 kS s Azone gt 1Bdiv kae x1 16block 1 Trigger kind Window Trigger a TRIGGER Trigger 2 7 Mode Sync trigger 3 7 Ref wave Auto CH CH 1 4 Delay 18 Edge Rise 5 7Freq 5 Hz Level 20 r
311. ts of the Analysis There are two methods to save the results of the analysis to flash ATA memory card in CSV format Saving on the screen displaying the results of the analysis Pressing the F3 Save key on the screen displaying the results of the analysis saves the information to the flash ATA memory card The file is automatically assigned the name harmo csv is automatically numbered from 000 to 999 The number returns to 000 after 999 Frequency 5 QHZ ESC E s Save Print Saving with the FILE key Pressing this key saves the measurement data in binary format along with the most recent results of the analysis File name is esy Asterisks contain the file name of the measurement data The data that are saved using the FILE key are as follows Save format Binary Format ASCII Format Save All Blocks Analysis Method Save B Save A Waveform data Waveform data Waveform data W f KKKKEKEK lat HRKEKEEE OGY blk dat ave orm Analyzed data Analysis kkkkkkkk csv Auto Analysis Waveform data RERKEKKK OGY Analyzed data RERKEEKK OGY Waveform data KEKKEKKK OGY Waveform data blk dat For details see 10 3 Saving Measurement Data to the PC Memory Card IM OR100E 01E 9 17 sishjeuy d1uOWIeH 9 8 Recording the Results of the Analysis Pressing the F4 Print key or the PRINT key on
312. tween linear and logarithmic Pressing the F2 Lin Log key at the screen displaying the RMS values switches the horizontal axis z 2 3 When the parameter to be analyzed is Content or Phase a Mar 28 98 14 21 TEMS Mar 28 98 14 21 ME gt Content Channel CH4 Phase Channel CH4 5 a 58 128 180 188 D 2 Harmonic order Harmonic order IM OR100E 01E 9 13 9 6 Analyzing Automatically If you set the analysis method to Auto in 9 3 Setting Conditions to Capture Measured Data and measurement is started harmonic analysis is performed automatically after capturing one cycle of data and the results are displayed If you selected anything other than Off for saving the results to the PC card then the specified results of the analysis are saved to the flash ATA memory card every time the analysis completes The file is automatically assigned the name trend csv is automatically numbered from 000 to 999 The number returns to 000 after 999 The measurement data are captured in the harmonic analysis mode in the same way as in the memory mode When the parameter to be analyzed is table2 Harmonic Lis 12W CHS CHA Or Act PLkW Content Phasel Or 768 188 888 888 888 888 00A 888 888 00A 888 00A 888 888 00A 00A 00A 00A 00A 888 888 Act P T6AkW App P
313. u Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Operation Keys Moves between setting parameters Operating Procedure 1 Setting the simultaneous recording Press the F3 key to select Numeric 2 Setting the recording interval Select the time interval for recording 3 Setting the playback Sets the recording interval when recording the captured data with digital values 4 Setting the logic channel Setting whether or not to record the logic input Off Do not record Both Bottom Equal Record each bit of the measurement data using 0 and 1 Note All settings besides the ones shown above do not affect the digital value recording IM OR100E 01E 7 5 Bulpiosey wnje y x 7 4 Setting the X Y Recording Format Setting Screen m Men aa Mode Realt ime _ Same as the analog s Format gt XY waveform Style N 3 Sametime print On Gauge print On Grid Fine Time print On Same as the analog CH message Off waveform CH print Off 4 Y1 CH2 On Y2 CH3 Off Y3 CH4 Off Line Dot Displays the setting Operation Keys menu Makes a selection Displays the next set of selections Moves between setting parameters Operating Procedure 1 Setting the recording format Press the F4
314. uit Configuration and Output Circuit Configuration 100pF 74LS07 or equivalent 74LS07 or equivalent Maximum input voltage range 0 5 to 5 5V Input circuit TRIG IN Output circuit TRIG OUT IM OR100E 01E 12 1 SUOI IUNY SNOSUBUP 99ISI RI 12 1 Running Multiple OR Series in Synchronized Operation Condition in which synchronous operation does not work If an external trigger signal is applied to this recorder while it is recording or capturing data the external signal is discarded cannot operate synchronously Therefore to ensure that the Type A synchronous operation works properly set the mode to single on the OR Series recorder providing the trigger signal and the ones receiving the signal AN CAUTION Applying voltages outside the maximum input voltage to the input terminals may damage the input circuit When operating multiple OR Series Recorders use a power supply with a large enough capacity to handle the increased power consumption For information regarding the maximum power consumption see 14 8 General Specifications Note To avoid erroneous operation due to noise use connection cables that are 3 m or less 12 2 IM OR100E 01E 12 1 Running Multiple OR Series in Synchronized Operation Setting Screen TRIGGER Ext trig IEE Start time Off Cor Lee Len L Setting the external trigger At the screen that appears when the
315. unding terminal Power Supply Rating Rated power supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Permissible supply voltage range 90 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permissible supply voltage frequency range 48 to 62 Hz Maximum power consumption 70 to 90 VAC AC adapter rated output voltage 12 VDC AC adapter maximum rated output current 2 6 A Function grounding Functional grounding When using the AC adapter noise may be reduced if the functional ground is connected to the earth GND Use the functional ground terminal as necessary IM OR100E 01E 2 13 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF When Using the NiMH Battery Pack Sold Separately Installation of the Dedicated NiMH Battery Pack Follow the warnings below when using the NiMH battery The electrolyte solution inside the battery is alkaline When the solution comes in contact with clothing or skin due to a leakage or an explosion it may cause damage to the clothing or the skin The solution can cause blindness if it enters your eye If the solution enters your eye run clean water on the eye Do not wipe the eye Then contact a physician immediately e When replacing the NiMH battery turn OFF the power switch on the front panel and unplug the AC adapter from the power outlet This will avoid accidents such as shorting the recharge circuit Only use the NiMH battery pack from YOKOGAWA Model No 788021 e Do not leave the battery under dire
316. urement data of the current block Current block is the last block displayed on the screen Immediately after data capturing current block is the last block that was captured If the captured data was displayed it is the last block that was displayed To change the current block display the block that you wish to save on the screen For details see pages 6 12 and 6 13 IM OR100E 01E 10 5 eIpayy jeuse xy Huisp g 10 3 Saving the Measurement Date to the PC Memory Card File Size File size varies depending on the data format being saved Binary format The file size can be determined from the following equation File size file header data File header 192 64x number of analog channels number of logical bits 64x number of analog channels Data 2xnumber of data points to savex number of analog channels number of logical channels Example Memory length 10 div 800 data points Number of analog channels 4 channels Number of logic channels 2 channels A B Number of logic bits 4 bits 2 bits from A and B If there is no range specified for saving the data file size becomes File header 192 64x 4 4 64x4 960 Data 2x800x 4 2 9600 File size 960 9600 10560 bytes ASCII format The file size of an ASCII file cannot be determined by an equation as in the binary format Refer to the following example Memory length 10 div 800 data points Number of analog channels 4 channels File size is a
317. urement input voltage does not exceed the value indicated below If it exceeds the value it may damage the input section or cause electric shock Measurement input voltage 250 Vrms CAT ID Also never allow the sum of the floating voltage and the measurement input voltage to exceed 250 Vrms High voltage is applied at the connection point of the probe Never touch closer to the connection point beyond the indicated line while the signal is being input to the probe CAUTION Turn OFF the OR100E OR300E when connecting or disconnecting the round type connector from the logic input connector e Never modify extend for example the connection leads Do not exceed the allowable input range V including the common voltage It may damage the logic probe or the OR100E OR300E Note If the logic probe is not connected to the OR100E OR300E the waveform becomes 1 High 2 10 IM OR100E 01E 2 4 Connecting the Power Supply and ON OFF This recorder can use three types of power supplies e AAA Alkaline dry cell e AC Power supply You need an AC adapter sold separately e Rechargeable battery You need a NiMH battery and an AC adapter for recharging Both are sold separately e DC Power supply You need a DC DC converter sold separatery When using AAA Alkaline Batteries Precaution on the Alkaline Dry Cell CAUTION e Place the batteries in the right direction Otherwise the batteries may leak or explode
318. ut terminal can damage the input circuit Note The external sensor must be selected carefully and its frequency and phase characteristics taken into account Connecting External I O Signals You can connect external signals to the EXT INPUT OUTPUT terminal on the upper panel of the recorder To meet the recorder s specifications external equipment must comply with IEC1010 1 or CSA1010 1 Connecting the Wire On the top panel press the rectangular part above the EXT INPUT OUTPUT terminal with a minus screw driver and insert the wire If you release the screw driver the wires will be fastened GND TRIG IN SAMPLING CLOCK TRIG OUT SY S SS IM OR100E 01E 2 5 uoneiodo a10jog D 2 3 Connecting the Signal Cable CAUTION Applying voltage outside the allowable input voltage 0 5 to 5 5 V to the input terminal may damage the input circuit Wires Recommended wire solid wire 1 0 AWG18 cross sectional area 0 75 mm Usable wires solid wire g0 4 to 1 0 AWG26 to 18 cross sectional area 0 3 to 0 75 mm AWG22 to 20 element wire at least 40 18 Bare wire 10 mm External Trigger Input Trig in Input a TTL level trigger signal into this terminal See page 11 6 for setting the terminal This terminal is also used when operating multiple OR100Es OR300Es synchronously This terminal is shared with the external sampling clock or when starting stopping the recorder with external signals Ex
319. voltage TC Type K thermocouple RMS Rms value of the AC voltage OR300E only Changing the Measurement Range Changing the measurement range changes the full scale and the amplitude of the displayed waveform Select the channel you wish to change by pressing the corresponding F1 to F4 key A screen for setting the measurement range is displayed Sep 82 97 28 32 fi timediv i f zf ann J to 4 T x 2 5 00 5 1V DIV 4 Full scale 7 2 5 00 7 3 5 00 5 1V DIV 4 2 5 004 4 4 5 00 5 1V DIV 4 4 5 00 4 Measurement range 7 7 EE oq ABDI Input Filter Mull Scal ing wc vjott v ott v 2 Comm Increase the measurement range waveform amplitude becomes smaller Decrease the measurement range waveform amplitude becomes larger Set the time axis time div 3 4 IM OR100E 01E 3 4 Changing the Measurement Range and Sample Rate Displayed waveforms for different ranges Changing the Sample Rate The sample rate is automatically determined by the time axis setting The time axis is set in time div Time div is the time in 1 div Sample rate is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen that appears when AIEGI time div the MENU key is pressed Menu Mode 4 kS s Format Length Eases T scale Mag 32block Trigger kind Normal Sample rate IM OR100E 01E sJ sN BWII S4I4 3 5
320. yright 1999 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM OR100E 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered if some accessories are missing or if they appear abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them OR100E Main Body Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the rear panel match those on your order Whenever you contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument tell him your unit s serial No OR100E Model Suffix Code Specifications OR122 2 channel isolated input model OR142 4 channel isolated input model Display language 2 English Options PM Carring case package UL CSA standard power supply code PF Carring case package VDA standard power supply code PR Carring case package SAA standard power supply code PS Carring case package BS standard power supply code OR300E Model Suffix Code Specifications OR322 2 channel isolated input model OR342 4 channel isolated input model Display language 2 English Options PM Carring case package UL CSA standard power supply code PF Carring case package VDA standard power supply code PR Carring case package SAA standard power supply code PS Carring case package BS standard power supply code NO Instrument No When contacting the dealer from which you purcha
321. ysis to save to the flash ATA memory card 10 Setting the start time stop time 11 Set the start and stop times for the operation that was selected in step 9 If the start time is set to OFF the operation starts upon pressing the START button If the stop time is set to OFF the operation selected in step 8 is performed repeatedly Setting the result of the analysis to save Set whether or not to save the result of the analysis to the flash ATA memory card for each parameter that is analyzed IM OR100E 01E 9 4 Setting the Display Format When specifying the range to analyze waveform analysis Setting parameters are the same as the display format for the memory mode except for the following items X Y display is not available Time axis scale is the most recent scale specified either by the memory mode or by the latest display of the measurement data The time axis scale can be changed using the Time Axis key on the display screen after capturing the measurement data as in the memory mode Accumulation of display is not available For details see section 6 3 Setting the Display Format When analyzing automatically automatic analysis If the display contents are set to Off or if displaying the captured data the waveform is displayed with the most recent format specified in either the memory mode setting waveform analysis setting or by the latest display of the measurement data However
322. yzed is table Mar 20 98 14 20 WEM Harmonie Lis Channel CH4 Or RMSIY 1 Content Phasel Or 1 182 1 108 8 8 8 H Harmonic order 3 al 1 3 59 7 3 5 1 4 1 4 113 6 5 T A T 1 8 63 3 T 9 a4 A G 169 4 9 1 a4 0 5 47 5 1 13 A A A A A A 13 15 A A A A 15 1T A A A A A A 17 19 A A A A A A 19 2 A A A A A A 2 23 A A A A A B 23 25 A A A A 8 8 25 eT A A A A A A 27 29 A A A A A A 29 3 A A A A A A 3 33 A A A A 8 8 33 35 A A A A 8 25 3T A A A A A A 37 39 A A A A A B 29 THD IEC 2 4 THD CSA 2 4 Total RMS 2 1U Frequency 56 Hz Switching the harmonic order Switching the harmonic order You can switch the display of the even harmonics and odd harmonics Pressing the F2 Odd Even key at the screen displaying the results of the analysis switches between the two 9 12 IM OR100E 01E 9 5 Analyzing by Specifying the Range When the parameter to be analyzed is RMS same for Content Phase Mar 24 98 14 20 EEMNES RMSIU Channel CH4 xA ABI x0 A1 xf SAA a F T Harmonic order ann im a 18 ria 284 rea 385 3A 4B 4a THD TEC THD CSA 2 4 Tota l RMS Frequency 56 Hz ESC Lin EE Save Print Kee eea ee Switching the horizontal axis Switching the time axis RMS value If the parameter to be analyzed is RMS you can switch the horizontal axis be
323. z CHANnel lt X gt INPut Function Syntax Example Sets queries the input to the specified analog channel CHANnel1 lt X gt INPut OFF DC RMS TC GND lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt INPut CHANNEL1 INPUT DC CHANNEL1 INPUT CHANNEL1 INPUT DC Description RMS is only available on the OR300E IM OR100E 01E CHANnel Group CHANnel lt X gt LOWScale CHANnel lt X gt POSition Function _Sets queries the lower limit scale for Function Sets queries the zero point for the specified temperature measurements channel Syntax CHANnel lt X gt LOWScale lt NR gt Syntax CHANnel lt X gt POSition lt NRE gt lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt LOWScale lt NR gt 50 to 580 10 steps Example CHANNEL1 LOWScale 20 CHANNEL1 LOWSclae lt X gt 1 to 4 CHANne1 lt X gt POSition lt NR gt POSition 0 1Pos Step _5 CHANNEL1 LOWScale 20 magnification X10 105 0 to 105 0 magnification x5 55 0 to 55 0 CHANnel lt X gt MAGNi magnification x2 25 0 to 25 0 Function Sets queries the Y axis zoom factor for the magnification x1 15 0 to 15 0 specified channel magnification x2 3 11 6 to 11 6 Syntax CHANnel lt X gt a MAGNI lt Character string gt modii fication x1 2 10 0 to 10 0 lt X gt lt 1 to 4 when you set input to RMS on DR300 CHANne1 lt X gt MAGNi magnification x5 0 0 to 40 0 lt Character string gt 1 2 magnification x2 0 0 to 10 0 2 3 1 5 4 5 3 Q

OR100E/OR300E Handy Oscillographic Recorder User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents